JP7466196B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

Some conventional gaming machines display images on a display and output sounds from a speaker device during effects such as effects to liven up the game or to notify of an error. In such gaming machines, a directional speaker device that has a sharp directivity toward the player in front of the machine when a specific error occurs, for example, is used in the speaker device, and an array speaker device in which multiple speaker units are arranged in an array as the directional speaker device has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-13334 A

However, with such gaming machines, there is a problem in that it is difficult to arrange the multiple speaker units required to obtain the desired directivity in an array due to the constraints of the horizontal or vertical size of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is desirable to use a speaker device that is not subject to the constraints of the horizontal or vertical size of the gaming machine and that makes it possible to obtain the desired directivity with simple control.

The present invention was made in consideration of these points, and aims to provide an amusement machine that uses a speaker device that is not restricted by the horizontal or vertical size of the machine, and that can obtain the desired directivity with simple control.

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine according to this embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration:

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine including a gaming machine main body (casing 401), a front door attached to the gaming machine main body, a speaker device (400) attached to the gaming machine main body or the front door, and a control means (e.g., a sound control process performed by a sub-CPU 201) for controlling the output of an audio signal to the speaker device,
a first speaker unit (500) that outputs a first sound wave (550) based on the audio signal and is disposed on the first axis so that the first sound wave is output to the outside of the gaming machine from a first opening portion that is circular with the first axis as a center axis;
a second speaker unit (600) that is disposed on the one axis farther from the first opening portion than the first speaker unit so as to output a second sound wave (650) based on the audio signal and output the second sound wave from a second opening portion having an annular shape with the one axis as a center axis to the outside of the gaming machine;
In the output control, the control means performs timing control (for example, control for convergence directivity, control for diffusion directivity) to adjust a first sound output timing of the first sound wave by the first speaker unit and a second sound output timing of the second sound wave by the second speaker unit so that the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at a wave field synthesis location outside the gaming machine within a predetermined time difference ;
The control means performs a second timing control in the timing control to adjust the first sound output timing and the second sound output timing so that, in the second performance, the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at a circular wave field synthesis line that is outside a midline between an inner circumference circle and an outer circumference circle of the second opening portion in a plan view of the second opening portion from the one axial direction as the wave field synthesis location, within the predetermined time difference.
It is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine of the above configuration, a speaker device is used in which the first speaker unit and the second speaker unit are arranged on a single axis, which is less restricted by the left-right or up-down size of the gaming machine than when multiple speaker units are arranged in an array, and the desired directivity can be realized by simply controlling the first sound output timing of the first sound wave by the first speaker unit and the second sound output timing of the second sound wave by the second speaker unit so that the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at the wave field synthesis location within a predetermined time difference, such that the reinforced portion of the first sound wave and the second sound wave is directed toward the wave field synthesis location.
Furthermore, by simply controlling the first sound output timing of the first sound wave by the first speaker unit and the second sound output timing of the second sound wave by the second speaker unit so that the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at a circular wave field synthesis line that is outer than the midline between the inner and outer circles of the second opening portion in a planar view when the second opening portion is viewed from one axial direction, within a predetermined time difference, it is possible to realize the desired directivity (diffusion directivity) in which the reinforced portion of the first sound wave and the second sound wave progresses so that the radius of the circle increases over time in a planar view when the second opening portion is viewed from one axial direction.

In addition, in the gaming machine described above,
In the timing control, the control means performs a first timing control (control to achieve convergence directionality) to adjust the first sound output timing and the second sound output timing so that, in a first performance, the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at a wave field synthesis point on the one axis as the wave field synthesis location within the specified time difference, and the specified time difference may be the maximum time difference at which the human hearing does not recognize the sound produced by the first sound wave and the sound produced by the second sound wave as different sounds .

With the gaming machine of the above configuration, the desired directivity (convergence directivity) can be realized by simply controlling the first sound output timing of the first sound wave by the first speaker unit and the second sound output timing of the second sound wave by the second speaker unit so that the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at the wave field synthesis point on one axis within a predetermined time difference.

The gaming machine with the above configuration can provide a gaming machine that is not subject to restrictions in width and height of the gaming machine and can obtain the desired directivity with simple control.

A diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the internal structure of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. A diagram for explaining the playability of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a diagram for explaining the modes of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A figure showing a pattern arrangement table of the first gaming machine related to this embodiment. A figure showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine related to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, the stop operation modes, and the display combinations, etc., of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. A figure for explaining the limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a pattern code storage area of a first gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a press sequence storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing the power-on process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance/start check process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the start of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the end of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of this embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an outline of the speaker device of the second gaming machine of this embodiment, (b) is a diagram for explaining the opening portions of the first speaker unit and the second speaker unit for outputting sound waves to the outside, and (c) is a diagram showing an outline of the speaker unit provided in the speaker device. (a) is a diagram for explaining an outline of the convergence directivity among the directivities realized by the speaker device of the second gaming machine of this embodiment, (b) is a diagram for explaining an outline of the diffusion directivity, and (c) is a diagram for explaining an outline of the normal directivity. 13 is a diagram for explaining interference between an upper first sound wave and a lower second sound wave in a first game according to the present embodiment. FIG. (a) is a diagram for explaining the control of convergence directivity in this embodiment, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example for explaining the relationship between the timing of output of a first sound wave by a first speaker unit and the timing of output of a second sound wave by a second speaker unit in the control of convergence directivity. (a) is a diagram for explaining the control of diffusion directionality in this embodiment, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example for explaining the relationship between the timing of outputting a first sound wave by a first speaker unit and the timing of outputting a second sound wave by a second speaker unit in the control of diffusion directionality. A diagram showing an example of a circuit related to the control of directivity in a second gaming machine according to this embodiment. A figure showing a first variant example of a circuit related to the control of directivity in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. A figure showing a second modified example of a circuit related to the control of directivity in the second gaming machine of this embodiment.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that in this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be used as an example of the gaming machine.

[1. Structure of a Pachislot Machine]
First, the structure of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the slot machine 1, and Figure 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the slot machine 1. For ease of explanation, the following explanation of the external structure may include a part of the internal structure, and the explanation of the internal structure may include a part of the external structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 has a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged at the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged at the lower front part of the cabinet G.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that the rear wall G3 and bottom wall G5 are not shown in Figures 1 and 2. The top wall G4 of the cabinet G has two openings G4a that penetrate in the vertical direction and are spaced a certain distance apart in the horizontal direction. Wooden plate members G4b are attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to secure the slot machine 1 to the game island (not shown) when it is installed in an amusement facility, and as long as such a method of securing the fastening is ensured, it can be made of metal or resin, or can be formed integrally with the top wall G4. As long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, some or all of the components can be made of wood or resin.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G102 that opens forward is formed on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space across the intermediate support plate G1, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. The upper space is the space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and contains the main display device 210, which will be described later, and the like. The lower space is the space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and contains the reel unit RU, the main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. In other words, as long as each device etc. can be appropriately accommodated within the cabinet G, the cabinet G may not have a partition between the upper and lower spaces. The cabinet G may simply be referred to as a "box" or "main body", or, since it functions as a frame that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, it may also be referred to as a "main body frame", "support body", "support frame", "fixing frame", etc.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. In other words, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door provided on the front side of the slot machine 1.

The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are each attached to the cabinet G so as to be freely opened and closed, for example, by an opening and closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Note that it is also possible to configure either the upper door mechanism UD or the lower door mechanism DD to be openable and closable by the above-mentioned opening and closing mechanism, while the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in the open state.

The upper door mechanism UD has a performance display window UD1 provided in the center, and an upper lamp 23 provided above the performance display window UD1. The performance display window UD1 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows the performance image displayed on a screen device C that constitutes the main display device 210 (described below) provided on the rear side of the window to be viewed. Note that in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays the performance through the performance display window UD1 may be described as the main performance display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 located approximately in the center of its upper part, and a reel unit RU attached to the rear side of the main display window 4, on the inside of the cabinet G.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the periphery of the reel body, and multiple (e.g., 20) patterns are drawn on the reel band at a predetermined interval along the rotation direction of the reel. In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is, for example, configured as a transparent panel made of resin, and at least a part (e.g., three) of the patterns on the periphery of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R can be seen. Additionally, light sources (reel lamps, which are included in the lamps and LEDs described below) are provided inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at positions where the symbols can be seen at least through the main display window 4, and at least while each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is spinning, they are illuminated from the inside with a constant brightness, ensuring the visibility of the symbols.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a sub-performance display unit 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4, and a performance button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-performance display unit 22 displays performance images displayed on the sub-display device 220 described below. The sub-performance display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a performance display, but also as one of the performance buttons. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that accepts performance operations (performance operations) by the player.

The lower door mechanism DD has a roughly horizontal base formed below the main display window 4, and includes a MAX BET button 6a, a 1 BET button 6b, and a settlement button 9 on the left side, a performance button 10a located roughly in the center, and a medal slot 5 on the right side.

The MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b are operation units that accept game operations (betting operations, which can also be called "insertion operations" or "betting operations") by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the pachislot machine 1. When the MAX BET button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (e.g., 3 medals) and the number of credited medals is equal to or greater than that difference, the maximum number of medals is bet. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than that difference or more, no medals are bet. Also, when the 1 BET button 6b is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts the player's game operation (settlement operation) to return (settle) credited medals. If the settlement button 9 is operated when there are no credited medals, the player may be able to accept a game operation (C/P mode selection operation) to select either a credit mode (C mode) in which medals inserted or paid out are credited, or a pay mode (P mode) in which medals are not credited, within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). In other words, the settlement button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The performance button 10a is an operation unit that accepts the player's operation (performance operation) for performance.

The medal insertion slot 5 accepts medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 from outside by a player. The accepted medal is detected by a selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not it is a proper medal. If a single accepted medal is not proper, the accepted medal is returned from a medal payout outlet 11, which will be described later. If a single accepted medal is proper and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medal is returned from a medal payout outlet 11, which will be described later.

The lower door mechanism DD also has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned base. The information display device 14 is configured to include multiple lamps (LEDs) and a 7-segment LED, and displays information related to the game depending on the lighting state of the lamps.

The lower door mechanism DD has a start lever 7 located on the left side below the base, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R located approximately in the center, and a locking mechanism 15 located on the right side. The start lever 7 is attached so that it can be tilted freely within a predetermined angle range, and is an operation part that accepts a game operation (start operation) by the player to start a game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation part that accepts a game operation (stop operation) by the player to stop the respective rotations.

The locking mechanism 15 is, for example, a key cylinder lock. When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the manager of the amusement store (for example, a store clerk of the amusement store, etc.; the same applies below) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the right to unlock the door, and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. The locking mechanism 15 may not only have the function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism, but also the function of a reset switch. For example, when the manager of the amusement store inserts the door key into the keyhole and turns it to the left, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described below. In this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the upper door mechanism UD can also be opened in conjunction with this, or a separate locking mechanism corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be provided so that the opening and closing can be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a lower panel 13 located in the center of its lower part, a medal tray 12 located below the lower panel 13, a medal payout opening 11 located above the medal tray 12, and sound transmission holes 24a, 24b located on the left and right of the medal payout opening 11.

The lower back panel 13 is composed of a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source (lower back lamp included in the lamps and LEDs described later) for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachinko slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from a hopper device 32 described later and those returned from a selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a, 24b are on the rear side of each, and transmit sound such as sound effects and background music output from speakers 35a, 35b (the symbol of the speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) attached to the inside of the cabinet G toward the front side of the pachinko slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided in response to the interior of the cabinet G being divided into an upper space and a lower space, but as long as the opening in the cabinet G can be opened and closed appropriately, they can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. They can also be configured as a double door mechanism in the front-to-rear direction (for example, an outer door and an inner door). The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors," or can be referred to as "opening and closing members," "door members," or "door members" because they function as members that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G.

[1-1-3. Variable display section]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and the main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R described below are driven and controlled to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed variably. When the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated (when the player performs a stop operation), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R described below are driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed stationary.

In other words, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 constitutes a variable display section (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols in multiple rows, or multiple variable display sections (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols. The variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)" or a "variable display section (means)". The symbols can also be referred to as "pictures" or "designs", and since they are information that can be visually identified by the player, they can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense.

The main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutively arranged symbols are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas of each column (the symbols are displayed in a 3 row x 3 column format within the frame of the main display window 4). The main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as the "symbol display area" or "window section", etc.

In addition, a winning line is defined in the main display window 4. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a specified combination of symbols is displayed when the symbols in all columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stopping operation. In this sense, the winning line can also be called a "winning line" or a "determination line". The winning line is also configured as a line connecting any of the areas in each column. In other words, when the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, a maximum of 27 winning lines can be defined. However, in practice, one or more of these lines can be defined as winning lines, and the remaining lines can be defined as inactive lines that are not winning lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the middle area of reel 3R is called the "center line," the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the upper area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "top line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "bottom line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "cross-up line," the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "cross-down line," and so on. These are lines that connect the areas of each row in a straight line, so one or more of these lines are often defined as the active line. However, as mentioned above, so-called irregular lines that connect the areas of each row with broken lines can also be defined as the active line.

In order for the active lines to be activated, the player must bet the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start the game) before starting the game. The number of active lines that are activated may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the above-mentioned three lines, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line", are defined as active lines, in the former case, the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are activated regardless of the number of bets, from 1 to 3. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" are activated, and if the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets), the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are activated.

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, and thus displays symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, but the symbol display format in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels can be one, two, or four or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column can be one, two, or four or more, to display symbols in a format different from the above format. In this case, the number of effective lines that can be defined can also be increased or decreased as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit displays the patterns by rotating each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub display device 220 described below, or it may be configured using other display devices (e.g., organic EL, 7-segment LED, etc.). It may also be configured using other physical devices (e.g., belts, etc.). The arrangement and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main display unit directly related to the game, controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. In addition, a variable display unit may be provided as a sub-display unit related to a performance not directly related to the game, controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later. The sub-display unit may be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220. In other words, not only the main display unit but also the sub-display unit may be provided as a variable display unit that displays a variable pattern in response to the player's start operation (or the establishment of other start conditions) and stops the pattern in response to the player's stop operation (or the establishment of other stop conditions). In this case, in order to enable the player to identify whether the variable display unit is directly related to the game or not, an identification display with characters such as "reel" or "main reel" may be attached near the main display unit, so that the variable display unit can be identified as the main display unit. Such identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes a medal insertion slot 5 that accepts medals inserted into the slot machine 1 by a player from outside. The medal insertion slot 5 and a selector 31 described below have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b, and such an insertion operation can be rephrased as a betting operation, for example. Therefore, the medal insertion slot 5 can be said to be a betting operation detection unit (means) that can detect the betting operation of the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal insertion slot can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the slot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, the medal insertion slot is not necessarily a required configuration.

In this embodiment, the use of medals as gaming media is described as an example of gaming value that is used in games or awarded according to game results, but the gaming value used in this manner is not limited to this. For example, coins, gaming balls, gaming point data or tokens, etc. can also be used. Furthermore, gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "game value", etc.

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachislot machine 1 is provided with, for example, the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by a player. Note that the following operation units are merely examples, and a configuration having operation units different from these may be used. Alternatively, among these, the operation units that are not necessarily required may not be provided.

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b that accept the player's betting operation to use the medals deposited (credited) therein. In addition, such betting operation is detected by the bet switch 6S described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's bet operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are provided, but it is also possible to provide only the MAX bet button 6a without providing the 1 bet button 6b. In addition, it is also possible to provide a separate 2 bet button for betting two medals.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the start lever 7 that accepts a start operation by the player to start a game. This start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection unit (means) that can detect the start operation by the player. Note that the start lever only needs to be capable of detecting the start operation by the player, and its shape, position, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R that are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and accept the player's stop operation to stop the respective reels. In addition, such a start operation is detected by a stop switch 8S described below. Therefore, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's stop operation. Note that the stop buttons only need to be capable of detecting the player's stop operation, and their shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a settlement button 9 that accepts a settlement operation (return operation) by the player to return (settle) credited medals. In addition, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S described below. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) that can detect the settlement operation of the player. Note that the settlement button only needs to be capable of detecting the settlement operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Performance buttons]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes buttons 10a and 10b for effecting a game that accepts the player's effect operation. Such effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the buttons for effecting a game. Therefore, the buttons 10a and 10b for effecting a game and the detection switch constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. The effect button only needs to be capable of detecting the effect operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is possible to configure the machine without providing either of these buttons, or to configure the machine with only one of these buttons. It is also possible to configure the machine with three or more effect buttons.

The main uses of the performance buttons are to change the performance mode when a specific performance (for example, an operation-linked performance described below) is executed, and to perform selection and confirmation operations in a user menu described below. Therefore, it is possible to configure the system so that performance buttons are provided according to the purpose. For example, the performance buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the above-mentioned touch panel can be used for the latter purpose. For the latter purpose, it is also possible to configure the system so that a jog dial, cross key, or the like capable of receiving selection and confirmation operations is provided as a separate performance button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout outlet]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal payout outlet 11 that discharges medals that are paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. When a winning prize is won and medals are paid out, the medal payout outlet 11 awards the medals paid out from a hopper device 32 (described below) to the player, and can therefore be said to be part of a bonus awarding means that awards a bonus to the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine (described below), the medal payout outlet is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout opening 11. In other words, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) capable of storing the granted game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, this is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is provided with a lower back panel 13, which is composed of, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is depicted, and a lower back lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the rear side. The lower back panel 13 is basically intended to clearly show the player what model the slot machine 1 is, but it can also be configured as one of the performance execution means capable of executing a performance, for example, by the lighting state of the lower back lamp, or by configuring the lower back panel 13 itself as an image display device, etc.

[1-1-9. Information display section]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information about the game by its lighting state. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) that can display information about the game. .

The information display device 14 is configured to include, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an indication monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. The start lamp lights up to indicate that play can be started by operating the start lever 7. The replay lamp lights up to indicate that medals have been automatically inserted as a result of the replay operation. The bet number lamp lights up to indicate the number of medals bet. The credit lamp indicates the number of medals credited depending on how it lights up. The payout number lamp indicates the number of medals paid out (payout number) depending on the game result depending on how it lights up.

The instruction monitor is also configured to include a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (state display section). The notification lamp displays information on the stop operation by lighting in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information on the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, in an AT state). Note that the "mode that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified" refers to, for example, a manner in which the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order (which may be described as the "hitting order" in this embodiment) "1st (performing the first stop operation on reel 3L)", the number "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)", and the number "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)". Note that the notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, information about the stop operation may be displayed using either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp.

In this way, in this embodiment, in a situation where information on a stop operation is notified to a player, not only the sub-side notification means (for example, the main performance display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later, but also the instruction monitor as the main-side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later, notifies the information on the stop operation. Note that the notification mode in the main-side notification means and the notification mode in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. In other words, the main-side notification means only needs to notify in a mode that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to identify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means only needs to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main performance display unit 21 only needs to directly notify the instruction information for performing the first stop operation on the reel 3L.

In addition, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in the advantageous section, described below. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, described below, the section lamp lights up at any timing before play in the advantageous section begins, and when the advantageous section ends and transitions to a non-advantageous section, it goes out at any timing before play in the non-advantageous section begins. Note that the timing of lighting the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from a performance section (normal advantageous section) described below in a non-advantageous section or advantageous section to an increase section (AT state) described below in an advantageous section for the first time, the section lamp may light up at any timing before play in the increase section begins. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the section is in an advantageous section regardless of whether it is a performance section or an increase section, or may indicate at least the period from the start of the first increase section to the end of the advantageous section, including this.

The limit lamp also indicates, depending on the lighting state, whether or not a limit process described below has been executed. For example, by lighting up when a limit process has been executed, it notifies the player that a favorable state (e.g., AT state) has been forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. Also, by flashing when the execution of the limit process is imminent, it notifies the player that there is a high possibility that the favorable state will be forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. In addition to these, by providing triggers for lighting, flashing, or going off, it is also possible to appropriately notify other information regarding the limit process.

[1-1-10. Production display section]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 that display effect images. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 are capable of displaying effect images. The display unit (means) is also configured as one of the presentation execution means capable of presenting a presentation to the player from a visual perspective.

The main display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through a display window UD1. The main display device 210 is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and a screen device C that makes an image appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B. In this embodiment, the main display device 210 is configured in this way to enable advanced and powerful performance display, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to perform a performance from a visual perspective for the player, and it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL, or a display device such as a 7-segment LED, or it can be configured as a variable display device such as a sub reel or a dot display device. In addition, from such a perspective, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be appropriately changed. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is a game that is primarily entertaining based on the results of the winning combination, for example, it can be configured not to have a main performance display unit 21 (the same goes for the sub performance display unit 22).

The sub-performance display unit 22 includes a sub-display unit 220. The sub-display unit 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display unit. The sub-display unit 220 can be configured as another image display unit or display unit, as with the main display unit 210, and can also be configured as a variable display unit or a dot display unit. From this perspective, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. The main performance display unit 21 is configured as a large screen, so it mainly displays performances closely related to the current game, such as push order notifications, winning notifications, or continuous performances, while the sub-performance display unit 22 is configured as a small screen, so it is possible to display the display contents separately according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying performances that are not so closely related to the current game, such as game history. In this embodiment, the main performance display unit 21 and the sub-performance display unit 22 are configured to have two performance display units, but it is possible to configure the system without providing either of them, or to configure the system to have only one of them. It is also possible to configure the system to have three or more performance display units.

[1-1-11. Lamp]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is equipped with one or more lamps (light-emitting means) that can perform effects by their light-emitting modes (including not only lighting, blinking, or extinguishing, but also the brightness and light-emitting color when configured as a full-color LED), such as the upper lamp 23 given as an example. Furthermore, such light-emitting means is configured as one of the effect execution means that can perform effects from a visual perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc., of the light-emitting means can be appropriately changed.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, and operation unit lamps provided within each operation unit. The latter include a function to inform the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated, so when this function is exercised, the light emission pattern does not change depending on the performance content, but can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission pattern.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sound effects, background music, and the like. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute a sound output means capable of performing effects by outputting sound. They are also configured as one of the performance execution means capable of performing performances from an auditory perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like of the speakers can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production devices]
In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, it is also possible to provide a performance device other than the various performance devices (performance execution means) described above. For example, it is also possible to provide a performance device such as a movable performance device, a vibration performance device that performs a performance by vibration, or an air performance device that performs a performance by injecting air, and perform a performance. In other words, any of the performance devices that can perform a performance that can appeal to any of the five senses of the player (sight, hearing, touch, taste, smell) (allowing the player to recognize that a performance is being performed) can be used. Therefore, in this embodiment, "performing a performance" indicates that a performance may be performed using any one or more of the various performance devices (performance execution means) described above, unless otherwise specified.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. Selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a passage through which medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 5 flow down, and is provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 may be, for example, a medal sensor (described later). 31S and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and determines whether the detected medals are appropriate medals. If the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are appropriate medals and the medals are in a state where they can be accepted, the sorting device is controlled to guide the medals to the hopper device 32 side described below. In this case, the bet number or credit number is incremented by 1. On the other hand, if the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are not appropriate medals and the medals are not in a state where they can be accepted, the sorting device is controlled to return the medals through the cancel chute and from the medal payout outlet 11. If an abnormality occurs in the detection of medals by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by performing a reset operation after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam).

In other words, the selector 31 constitutes a gaming medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted gaming medium. The selector 31 also constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether the inserted gaming medium is proper or not. The selector 31 also constitutes a sorting means that stores the inserted gaming medium internally if it is proper, and discharges it to the outside if it is not proper. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine described below, the selector 31 is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 has, for example, a bucket section that stores medals inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and guided by the selector 31, a disk section that is provided at the bottom of the bucket section and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section and guides them one by one to the discharge section, a discharge section that discharges the medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge section.

The bucket is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Any medals exceeding this number are guided through a guide passage provided on the top side to the auxiliary medal storage 33 (described below). If the medals stored in the bucket become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by refilling the bucket with medals and performing a reset operation.

The disk unit has multiple medal-shaped cutouts formed radially from the center, and the central shaft is rotated in response to a drive signal to guide medals that fit into the cutouts one by one to the discharge unit. The rotation of the disk unit agitates the medals stored in the bucket unit. If an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by performing a reset operation after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam).

The count sensor detects medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when one medal is to be paid out, the disk section starts to rotate, and then the disk section stops rotating when the count sensor counts that one medal has been paid out. In this way, the correct number of medals is paid out.

In other words, the hopper device 32 constitutes a gaming media payout section (means) capable of paying out gaming media. Also, as described above, it can be said to be part of a bonus granting means for granting bonuses to players. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, which will be described later, it is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary Medal Storage]
The auxiliary medal storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The auxiliary medal storage 33 has, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and an auxiliary medal storage switch 33S that is provided near the storage section and detects the amount of medals stored in the storage section.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is released if the medals stored in the storage section are reduced to at least below the certain number and a reset operation is performed.

In other words, the auxiliary medal storage 33 constitutes a surplus gaming media storage section (means) capable of storing surplus gaming media. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc., of the auxiliary medal storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine as described below, this is not necessarily a required configuration.

[1-2-4. Power Supply
The power supply device 34 is provided in a lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b. When the power switch 34b is turned on, The power supply device 34 supplies power to the slot machine 1. The power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage of 100V supplied from a power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage required by each part, just like household electrical appliances. The power supply device 34 converts the converted power into electric power and supplies the converted power to each unit. In other words, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the necessary power to the gaming machine. can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 52 and reset switch 53 described below are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case described below), but these switches can also be configured to be provided on the power supply 34.

[1-2-5. Substrate]
The slot machine 1 includes the following boards as boards necessary for various controls. Note that the boards listed below are merely examples, and the slot machine 1 may include boards different from these boards, and may not include boards that are not essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the rear side of the reel unit RU inside the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is housed in a main control board case (not shown) made of resin that is transparent (or nearly transparent) so that its state can be visually confirmed. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

The specifications of the main control board 71 are subject to various constraints, and although it is basically configured with various electronic components DIP mounted, some or all of the various electronic components may be configured with SMT mounting (surface mounting). In this case, test points may be provided to check operation using a tester or oscilloscope. Small electronic components not exceeding 6 square mm may be used for some or all of the various electronic components. The board surface of the main control board 71 may also be configured with multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is a performance control board that controls performances, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or can be configured as an opaque (or nearly opaque) case made of another material. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other substrates]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and various devices connected to the main relay board 73, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the main relay board 73 is configured as a board separate from the main control board 71 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to provide all the functions of the main relay board 73 to the main control board 71 and not provide the main relay board 73 unless there is a particular problem. From this viewpoint, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Sub-relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and is an intermediate control board for relaying between the sub-control board 72 and various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to configure the sub-relay board 74 without providing the sub-relay board 74, by giving all the functions of the sub-control board 72, unless there is a particular problem. From this viewpoint, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, a plurality of boards may be provided as the sub-relay board.

(External common terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is attached to a specific position (e.g., the back side of the lower space) in the cabinet G, and outputs signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the slot machine 1. The external signals 1 to 4 can be set to have appropriate output start and end conditions, making it possible to notify the outside of the transition of the internal state of the slot machine 1 (e.g., bonus state or AT state) according to the game characteristics. The external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display device or hall computer, so that these devices can recognize not only the medal insertion/payout status and error occurrence status in the slot machine 1, but also the transition status of such internal states.

(Test machine interface board)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the test machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the Pachislot machine 1 (note that these relay boards are not installed in the Pachislot machine 1 as a released product for sale, so the main control board 71 for sale does not have various electronic components required for connecting to the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine.). For example, test signals for controlling main operations related to the game (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and test signals related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 are output via the second interface board 302 for the test machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of the pachislot machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Furthermore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other so that one-way serial communication is possible from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74.

The main control board 71 is equipped with a main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls the game. The main control circuit 100 is composed of, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), etc. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for sending various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, etc. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by the execution of the control programs. The clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. In addition, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as necessary. In this way, all game actions are controlled.

The sub-control board 72 is equipped with a sub-control circuit 200 as a performance control unit that controls performance. The sub-control circuit 200 is configured to include, for example, a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, etc. In addition, a ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 stores various control programs executed by the sub-CPU 201, various data tables, and various performance data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub-display device 220, lamp data related to the lamp/LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.). The sub-RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by the execution of the control program, and a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71. The random numbers for the effects may be generated and extracted within the sub-CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 32767, etc.), or may be generated and extracted by providing a random number circuit similar to the main control circuit 100. Also, instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, a sub-ROM may be included within the sub-control circuit 200, and various control programs and the like may be stored in the sub-ROM. Also, various performance data may be stored in the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and various data tables may be stored in the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200. Also, the sub-control circuit 200 may be configured to include a microprocessor dedicated to images such as a GPU (e.g., also called a "VDP"), which may be used to generate (edit) images to be displayed on the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220.

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, the key switch 52 for setting, the reset switch 53, the role ratio monitor device 54, the external central terminal board 55, the hopper device 32, the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and the power supply device 34 are electrically connected to the main control board 71. The door opening/closing monitor switch 56, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, and the information display device 14 are also electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73. If the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

Note that the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, information display device 14, first test machine interface board 301, and second test machine interface board 302 have already been explained, so explanations will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear with a predetermined reduction ratio, and the driving of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R rotates each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at a certain angle. Therefore, the main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and manages the symbol positions of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the count results. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for such management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index.

The setting key switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the slot machine 1 (for example, 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change) or when checking the setting of the slot machine 1 (setting check). Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage of the player in the game, and usually, the lower the setting value (for example, closer to setting 1), the lower the degree of advantage of the player, and the higher the setting value (for example, closer to setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player. The setting key switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an administrator of the gaming establishment inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and turned off when it is returned to the initial position from the counterclockwise position. Note that when the power supply of the slot machine 1 is off, the setting can be changed by turning the setting key switch 52 on and then turning the power supply on, and the setting can be checked by turning the setting key switch 52 on while the power supply of the slot machine 1 is on.

The reset switch 53 can detect a reset operation by the manager of the gaming establishment. The reset operation is an operation for releasing various error states. The reset switch 53 can also detect a setting value determination operation by the manager of the gaming establishment when the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated when the setting can be changed, the setting value increases by one each time it is operated (when it reaches setting 6, it returns to setting 1). In this way, the setting value determination operation can be performed. The setting value determined in this way is confirmed when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. In other words, the start switch 7S can detect a setting value confirmation operation by the manager of the gaming establishment. In this way, when changing the setting, a setting change operation is required, such as turning on the setting key switch 52, operating the reset switch 53 to select a setting value, operating the start lever 7 to confirm the selected setting value, and then turning off the setting key switch 52. This is one example of a setting change operation, and the setting can also be changed by other operations. Also, when changing or checking settings, the current setting value may be displayed, for example, on the credit lamp or payout number lamp mentioned above.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is, for example, composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information related to the game that is tallied and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information are used when the manager of the gaming facility checks whether the pachislot machine 1 has been tampered with. The role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. It may also be provided in another location within the cabinet G. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. In addition, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or for switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this is operated, the above-mentioned various ratio information may be displayed. In addition, assuming that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the role ratio monitor device 54. Also, immediately after power is turned on or after a predetermined time has elapsed since power is turned on (for example, about 10 seconds; a buffer time that takes into account the time required for the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to start up), in order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the role ratio monitor device 54 is functioning normally, it is desirable to configure it so that it lights up (or blinks) for a predetermined period of time with a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs are lit).

In the role ratio monitor device 54, for example, the top two digits display the type of the ratio information, and the bottom two digits display a value (%) indicating the ratio information. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information, etc.

The specific section ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of plays in a play section (for example, AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player was notified (or it may simply be the number of plays in an advantageous section) among the play sections of the target number of plays (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative", 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games", the same below). In addition, the continuous feature ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special feature (RB) (including the operation of the first type special feature (RB) when the feature continuous operation device (BB) related to the first type special feature is in operation) among the number of medals paid out in the play section of the target number of plays. The feature ratio information is information that indicates the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special feature (RB), the second type special feature (CB), and the normal feature (SB) to the number of medals paid out in the play section of the target number of plays. Here, the operation of the first type special feature (RB) includes the operation of the first type special feature (RB) in a state in which the feature continuous operation device (BB) related to the first type special feature is in operation, and the operation of the second type special feature (CB) includes the operation of the second type special feature (CB) in a state in which the feature continuous operation device (MB) related to the second type special feature is in operation.

In addition, the game section (for example, AT state) in which the information on the stop operation advantageous to the player was notified can be regarded as the operation of the role or the operation of the role continuous operation device, and can be the subject of aggregation and calculation in the respective ratio information. In other words, the role ratio monitor device 54 is sufficient as long as it appropriately displays the necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. In addition, for example, in the case of displaying continuous role ratio information in a model that does not have a first-class special role (RB), or in the case of displaying specific section ratio information in a model that does not have an advantageous section function (AT function), in a model in which the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information) does not exist, when the corresponding item is displayed, it is desirable to display a non-corresponding information identification display such as lighting two vertical bars in the center, for example, "- -", in the last two digits of the 7-segment LED that displays the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, so that the person checking can recognize at a glance that the corresponding information does not exist.

The door open/close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It may be configured to be provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD, or on the cabinet G side. A similar door open/close monitoring switch may also be provided on the upper door mechanism UD. The door open/close monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state. When the door open/close monitoring switch 56 turns on, a door open error occurs. In this case, the error state is released when the lower door mechanism DD is closed.

The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, and the sub-display device 220. In addition, the sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps and LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and a group of speakers such as speakers 35a and 35b via the sub-relay board 74.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, performance buttons, lamps/LEDs, and speakers have already been explained, so explanations will be omitted here.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61 is installed, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, in the same way as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56. It is the same as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has the function of monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by making it possible for such monitoring to be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side, it is also possible to store the opening/closing history of the lower door mechanism DD for a certain period of time. This opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the door being opened after the arcade manager has left outside of business hours, or if there is a history of the door being opened for a long period of time during business hours, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has occurred.

[3. Functional flow of the Pachislot machine]
Next, a functional flow of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a diagram for explaining a functional flow of the slot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (a bet operation is performed) and operates the start lever 7 (a start operation is performed), a random number value (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs the internal lottery process described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. The internal winning combination determines in advance the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed on the pay line. The types of combinations of symbols include those related to "winning" that give the player benefits such as the payout of medals, the operation of replay, and the operation of bonuses, and those related to other so-called "losing" combinations. The combination related to the payout of medals is called a "small combination", the combination related to the operation of replay is called a "replay combination", and the combination related to the operation of a bonus (bonus state) is called a "bonus combination". The combination that can be an internal winning combination (i.e., the combination of symbols that is permitted to be established) is sometimes simply called a "combination". The internal winning combination is sometimes called a "winning combination", a "predetermined result", or a "derivation allowable condition". The internal lottery means may also be referred to as a "role determining means," "winning role determining means," "pre-determination means," or "derivation allowable condition determining means."

When the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), the reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (a stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (main CPU 101 which performs the reel stop control process described later) controls the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the order in which the stop buttons are pressed) when the stop buttons are pressed. Note that the operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one like the start lever 7, and may be any operation means as long as the player can perform the start operation. Also, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button-shaped one like the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and may be any operation means as long as the player can perform the stop operation.

In the pachislot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reel rotates within this specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces." In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning role that allows the display of a winning symbol combination has been determined, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels within a specified time of usually 190 msec (four symbols) so that the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line as much as possible. The reel stop control means also uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning role are not displayed on the winning line. The symbols displayed when the reels stop spinning are sometimes referred to as "stop display" or "display result". The display of symbols when the reels stop spinning is sometimes referred to as "deriving the stop display" or "deriving the display result".

The reel stop control means may also be configured to perform automatic stop control to automatically stop each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reels started spinning, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. In this case, since the reels will stop without the player's stopping operation, it is desirable to stop the spinning of the reels so that no winning combinations are displayed along the pay line, even if any internal winning combinations have been determined.

When all the reels have stopped spinning in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 101, which performs the winning operation determination process described below) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line is a winning combination (or other predetermined combination). That is, it determines whether a winning combination (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved. Then, when the winning determination means determines that the displayed combination of symbols is a winning combination (or other predetermined combination) (that is, a winning combination (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved), a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player, or various controls are performed in response to this. In the pachislot machine 1, as an example, the above series of steps is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means may simply determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line corresponds to any of a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols, or may determine whether the combination corresponds to a combination of symbols related to an internal lottery role determined by the internal lottery means. In other words, in the former case, it may determine whether the combination of symbols related to a winning role is separate from the internal lottery role. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately controls the reels to stop, the prevention of erroneous winning can be sufficiently guaranteed, and the control burden related to erroneous winning detection can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, by making it possible to determine whether the combination of symbols related to a winning role is a combination of symbols that was permitted to win, if an erroneous winning occurs due to a reel malfunction, the erroneous winning can be detected, and security can be improved.

In addition, in pachislots, during the sequence of game operations described above, various effects are produced using the display devices (e.g., main display device 210, sub display device 220, etc.), the light output from various lamps (e.g., upper lamp 23, etc.), the sound output from speakers (e.g., speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are effect execution means that execute the effects. The content of the effect executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can be effect content determination means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for performance is sampled in addition to the random number value for the internal lottery. When the random number value for performance is sampled, the performance content determination means determines by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions) the performance to be executed this time from among multiple types of performance contents associated with the internal winning combination.

Next, when the presentation content is determined by the presentation content determination means, the presentation execution means executes the corresponding presentation in conjunction with each trigger, such as when the reels start to spin, when each reel stops spinning, and when it is determined whether or not a prize has been won. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing presentation content associated with an internal winning role, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning role (which can also be expressed as the combination of symbols to aim for or the order in which buttons should be pressed), thereby increasing the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of Pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to perform a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable and stationary manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp which symbols are located at which positions on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores data for identifying the types of symbols at each symbol position on at least each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As long as such a purpose is achieved, the data configuration can adopt various configurations, and in this embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described later is used as an example.

The symbol arrangement table specifies symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19") indicating the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Data for specifying the type of symbol (e.g., a symbol code) is also associated with each symbol position data. The symbol arrangement table also specifies that the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is "0". Note that the number of symbols in each row, the number of symbol types, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-2. Design Combinations]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of the displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the slot machine 1 can provide various benefits, move from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or move from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state, depending on the combination of the displayed symbols. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such combinations of symbols. For this reason, the main ROM 102 is provided with data for identifying such combinations of symbols. As long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, as an example, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) is used.

The symbol combination table specifies data (e.g., "display role" or "win activation flag") indicating the type of combination of multiple predefined symbols among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the winning line. The symbols that make up each symbol combination can be specified, for example, using the symbol code described above. Each symbol combination is also associated with data indicating the type of bonus (e.g., "payout, etc."). The symbol combination table basically has a data structure that corresponds to the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. The number of types of symbol combinations, or the content of the bonus, can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal lottery]
As described above, the Pachislot machine 1 is designed so that which combination of symbols is permitted to be displayed (predetermined) affects the game result. That is, the Pachislot machine 1 is capable of determining the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of benefit that can be awarded)) prior to (in advance of) the player's stop operation. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such an internal winning combination. For this reason, data for identifying such an internal winning combination is specified in the main ROM 102. Note that, as long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10) described later is used as an example.

The internal lottery table specifies data indicating the types of multiple predefined internal winning roles (for example, "No." or "winning number") and lottery values that determine each internal winning role in each game state. Note that the lottery values may vary depending on the set value. Also, each internal winning role is associated with a type of (corresponding) pattern combination that is permitted to be displayed. Note that in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to associate multiple pattern combinations with one internal winning role, and when such an internal winning role is determined, the pattern combination that is displayed is determined by the stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process of this embodiment described later (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (e.g., 0 to 65535) by a random number circuit is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value specified corresponding to each internal winning combination. Next, a determination is made as to whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result has overflowed). Then, if the result of this determination exceeds 65535 for a given internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is made to win (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after this determination has been made for all internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination for this game will be a "lose". Note that this is merely one example of the internal lottery process, and various methods can be used for the lottery process as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random number value may be sequentially subtracted and updated by a lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then the internal winning combination may be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) is below 0 (whether the lottery result has underflowed).

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the larger the lottery value specified for an internal winning role, the higher the probability of it being determined (winning probability). The winning probability of each internal winning role can be expressed as "lottery value specified for each winning number / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed such that the game result is affected by which combination of symbols is finally displayed by the player's stop operation among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning role. That is, the slot machine 1 is capable of performing control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of the combination of symbols finally displayed not only by the type of the determined internal winning role, but also by the timing of the player's stop operation and the order of pressing (also called "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp in what mode the stop control is performed for each internal winning role according to the player's stop operation mode. For this reason, the main ROM 102 is provided with data for specifying such a mode of stop control. Note that, as long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, and in this embodiment, a stop table and a pull-in priority table (not shown) are used as an example.

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of movement of the symbols (for example, the "number of sliding pieces") is specified for each symbol position data of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, suppose that a specified stop table is selected in a game in which a specified internal winning combination is determined. Next, suppose that a stop operation is performed on the reel 3L during rotation. At this time, suppose that the stop start position (the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". And suppose that the number of sliding pieces specified for the symbol position data "0" in the specified stop table is "4". Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at a symbol position (the position of the symbol position data "4") that has moved by four symbols (the planned stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table specifies data (the number of sliding pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that this data configuration is merely one example. Also, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally called "table control".

The attraction priority table specifies data (e.g., "attraction priority order") indicating which symbol combination is to be preferentially displayed (attracted) when there are multiple symbol combinations permitted to be displayed. For example, assume that a specified attraction priority order table is selected in a game in which a specified internal winning combination is determined. Here, the specified internal winning combination permits the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the specified attraction priority order table specifies attraction priorities such that symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over symbol combination A. Next, assume that a stop operation is performed on reel 3L while it is spinning. At this time, assume that the stop start position is "0".

Then, the main control circuit 100 searches for the presence of the symbols constituting the symbol combination A and the symbols constituting the symbol combination B for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position. If both symbols are not present, the position to stop is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, to stop at a closer position, to stop at a farther position, etc.). If only the symbols constituting the symbol combination A are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If only the symbols constituting the symbol combination B are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol constituting the symbol combination B, since the symbol combination B is displayed preferentially over the symbol combination A. Note that the pull-in priority order may be stored for all symbol positions during the rotation of the target reel according to the selected pull-in priority order table, or may be stored for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position when a stop operation is performed on the target reel. Also, such a data configuration is merely one example. In addition, using such a pull-in priority table to perform stop control is generally referred to as "control control."

In this embodiment, the stop control can be configured to be executed by performing only "table control" or by performing only "control control". Alternatively, the stop control can be configured to first tentatively determine the stopping position by performing "table control", then search for a more appropriate stopping position by performing "control control", and then change the stopping position depending on the search results.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, the combination of symbols that will ultimately be displayed on the pay line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors:

The first element is the determined internal winning role (lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is a "miss," then none of the combinations of symbols related to any replay role, combinations of symbols related to minor roles, or combinations of symbols related to bonus roles will ultimately be displayed on the winning line. Note that a "miss" can be considered to be one of the internal winning roles, or it can be considered to be a lottery result in which no internal winning role has been determined.

The second element is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbols (pressed position) when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to four symbols, so even if one of the internal winning roles is won as a result of the internal lottery process, if the symbols that make up a combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed are positioned on an active line (or on each active line if there are multiple), the combination of symbols may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. This is known as a "miss."

The third element is the player's push order (the order in which the player operates the stop button). For example, in this embodiment, an internal winning role associated with a combination of multiple symbols may be determined, and in this case, the combination of symbols that is ultimately displayed on the winning line may vary depending on the player's push order. Such an internal winning role is called a "push order role", and if it is a replay role, it may be called a "push order replay", and if it is a minor role, it may be called a "push order minor role".

[4-5. Game Status]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the player or to provide a desired gaming experience, it is possible to provide various gaming states as a state in which the game is played. An example of the gaming state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a bonus role is won and a symbol combination related to the bonus role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). It is also possible to configure the machine not to provide such a bonus state. It is also possible to configure the machine to provide multiple bonus states by providing multiple types of bonus roles. When a bonus role is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus role is carried over as an internal winning role over multiple games until the symbol combination related to the bonus role is displayed on an active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes called a "carry-over role". Also, such a carry-over state is sometimes called a "(bonus) flag interval" or "(bonus) internally in progress", etc.

The bonus state is a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery mode of the minor role (including the probability of winning and its contents, or the mode of stop control, etc.; the same applies below) compared to a state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state) (since it is also a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery mode of the replay role, the bonus state can also be considered as one mode of the RT state described below). Therefore, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state is a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is a less advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include a first type special role (RB), a role continuous operation device (BB) related to a first type special role, a second type special role (CB) (but not a carryover role), a role continuous operation device (MB) related to a second type special role, and a normal role (SB) (but not a carryover role). For example, the bonus states corresponding to each bonus role are configured as follows. The RB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined arbitrary number of winnings (e.g., the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined arbitrary number of games (e.g., the upper limit is 12 times) have been played. The BB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined arbitrary number of payouts (e.g., the upper limit is 285 coins) has been paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when more than a predetermined number of medals have been paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153 medals) or when RB or SB is won during the MB state. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played.

The condition for the bonus state to be activated is not limited to the display of a combination of symbols related to the bonus role on the pay line. For example, during the operation of the consecutive activation device (BB) related to the first type special role, the first type special role (RB) can be automatically activated when the consecutive activation device (BB) related to the first type special role starts to operate, when the game starts when the first type special role is not in operation, or when the operation of the first type special role ends. In other words, it is possible to control the RB to always be in operation during the operation of the BB without specifying the combination of symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB during the operation of the BB is sometimes called "JAC" and the like, and the specification in which the RB automatically operates during the operation of the BB is sometimes called "auto JAC". Also, during the operation of the BB, it is possible to control the RB to be in operation when the combination of symbols related to the specified RB is displayed on the pay line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the corresponding combination of symbols in this way is sometimes called "manual JAC". The same applies to the relationship between the special feature continuous operation device (MB) for the second type special feature and the second type special feature (CB). In other words, it is possible to control the CB to be in operation at all times while the MB is in operation without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB, and it is also possible to control the CB to be in operation when the specified combination of symbols related to the CB is displayed on the winning line while the MB is in operation.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is established, it is possible to transition to the RT state (activate the RT state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such an RT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple RT states are provided. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay role can be changed with respect to a state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a game state that is more advantageous than the non-RT state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a game state that is less advantageous than the non-RT state. In addition, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to between the multiple RT states. In this case, an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly, the probability of winning) is relatively favorable to the player may be referred to as a "high RT state" or a "high probability re-play state", and an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly, the probability of winning) is relatively unfavorable to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state" or a "low probability re-play state".

The RT state can be transitioned, for example, when any of the following transition conditions are satisfied. In addition, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to transitions between the multiple RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won; (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed; (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends; (4) When a specific combination of symbols is displayed when RB, BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and the player is not in the RB state, BB state or MB state; (5) When a predetermined number of plays have been played after the transition condition of (3) or (4) is met.

[4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the AT state (activate the AT state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such an AT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple AT states are provided. The AT state is a game state that is configured as a more advantageous state than a state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned push order role is won.

When multiple AT states are provided, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied by making the play period for each AT state (including the ease of extension if the period can be extended (or "topped up"; the same applies below)), the type of role for which information on a stop operation is notified, or the occurrence probability of notification of information on a stop operation different from each other. The transition and termination conditions for the AT state can be set appropriately according to the gameplay (excluding termination due to the execution of the limit process described below). The AT state may also be treated as if it were the bonus state described above, in which case it may be referred to as a "pseudo bonus state", etc.

In addition, the play period of the AT state may be managed by the number of games (play count) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game count management), or may be managed by the number of sets with a predetermined number of games as one set (set count management). It may also be managed by the number of payouts or net increase (difference in number of coins) during the AT state (payout number management, difference in number of coins management). It may also be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals in the AT state (for example, push order navigation when a push order minor role is won) (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. The play period granted when transitioning to the AT state and the play period granted when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. In addition, when multiple AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method or different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to transition to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (activate the ART state). That is, since the ART state means an AT state that is performed in a high RT state, the ART state differs from the AT state in that at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and control is performed to transition to the high RT state (or transition to the low RT state is avoided), but the basic control is the same as the AT state (if the transition to the high RT state (or transition to the low RT state is avoided) is the result of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player being notified, it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). In addition, when the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, it may be a state that first transitions to the AT state and then transitions to the high RT state to transition to the ART state, or a state that transitions to the high RT state and the AT state simultaneously (or approximately simultaneously) to transition to the ART state.

[4-5-5. Other game states]
In addition, the pachislot machine 1 can also provide game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) described later is a state in which the player plays a game, and can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state as a pseudo bonus state, so these can be considered as game states. From a similar perspective, for example, a game state can be provided that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to a bonus state. For example, when a bonus role is won (carried over), a game state in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus role is more likely to be displayed by stop control and a game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus role is less likely to be displayed relatively than this can be provided so that the degree of advantage of the player can be changed. In addition, for example, it is possible to configure the game so that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied by providing a game state in which a bonus role is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus role is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win).

In addition, the following methods can be adopted as a method for varying the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to an AT state (which may also include whether or not to extend the play period of the AT state while in the AT state; the same applies below). For example, a "special role" can be determined as an internal winning role. The number of medals awarded for the special role varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order in which the buttons are pressed, or a combination of these) (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), eight medals are paid out, and if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect), one medal or none is paid out).

If the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, then no decision is made as to whether or not to change the degree of advantage of transitioning to an AT state in the current game to a more advantageous one (this may include a decision as to whether or not to transition directly to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of the AT state; hereafter referred to as "advantage decision"). On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, then that advantage decision is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-mentioned specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, then that advantage decision is made in the current game. On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, then that advantage decision is not made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays using a specific game method, it is possible to configure the system so that, as a result of the game, an advantageous decision is made in the current game, or the advantageous decision is not made (the advantageous decision is restricted). Note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue into the next game and beyond, there is a risk that the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions only apply to the current game and not continue into the next game and beyond. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Playing area]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent excessive gambling, it is possible to provide various game zones as game states with concepts different from the above-mentioned game states. An example of such a game zone will be described below. The game zone is roughly divided into a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period during which it is not possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and has the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, the requirements can be appropriately changed accordingly.

(1) It is not possible to inform the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is not possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or when an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, a non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit process described below is executed in the favorable zone (i.e., when a predetermined value (e.g., the value of the favorable zone game number counter or favorable zone payout counter described below) that is updated as play progresses during the favorable zone becomes a specified value (e.g., 1,500 games or 2,400 coins)), a non-favorable zone is set as the initial state. Note that the predetermined value may be referenced, and if the predetermined value becomes a specific updated value even before it becomes a specified value, a non-favorable zone may be set using that as a condition. Also, when a predetermined termination condition is met during the favorable zone and the zone is determined to end (e.g., when a lottery for the end of the favorable zone is held and the lottery is won), a non-favorable zone may be set using that as a condition.
(4) In a non-advantageous zone, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, processing to determine whether or not to transition to an advantageous zone) can only be performed by referring to the determined internal winning role, and processing cannot be performed by referring to various parameters other than the internal winning role, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous zone (or the advantageous zone before transition). Note that which internal winning role has been determined can be determined by referring to data that directly indicates the internal winning role, such as a winning number, or by referring to data that indirectly indicates the internal winning role, such as a sub-flag (where multiple roles are treated as one determination target data) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning role.
(5) The non-advantageous zone is basically in state 1, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous zone. For example, it is not possible to set different states, such as the non-advantageous zone after the end of the advantageous zone being non-advantageous zone A, and the non-advantageous zone after the setting change being non-advantageous zone B.

(Advantageous area)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period during which the player can be notified of advantageous stop operation modes, and has the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, the requirements can be appropriately changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) If the setting value is changed (settings are changed), or if an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, it is not possible to set the advantageous zone as the initial state.
(3) If the limit processing described below is executed in a favorable zone, the favorable zone must be terminated.
(4) In the advantageous zone, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, processing to determine whether or not to shift the game state (mode) during the advantageous zone, or whether or not to extend a specific game state (mode)) can be performed not only by referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also by referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games played during the advantageous zone. Other examples of the various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, bonus information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, the timing of the stop operation of any of the reels, or the push order.
(5) A plurality of states can be set within the advantageous zone. For example, a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that is easy to transition to an AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase is positive when a stop operation is performed according to the notification can be set. In addition, for example, a CZ premonition state in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to a CZ state can be performed, which is set as a standby state until a transition to a CZ state is actually performed in response to a decision to transition to a CZ state in a normal state, or an AT premonition state in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to an AT state can be performed in response to a decision to transition to an AT state in a normal state or a CZ state, can be set according to gameplay.
(6) The fact that the vehicle is in a favorable zone can be notified by lighting up the zone lamp (status display unit) that can notify whether the zone is a non-favorable zone or a favorable zone (if the zone lamp is off, it can notify that the vehicle is in a non-favorable zone). As described above, the timing at which the zone lamp starts to light can be set to any timing. Basically, the zone lamp may start to light up when the vehicle moves from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone and continue to light up until the vehicle moves to the non-favorable zone, or the zone lamp may not start to light up when the vehicle moves from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (the favorable zone has started) and the favorable zone to which the vehicle has moved is in a normal state, and may start to light up when the vehicle first enters an AT state. If the favorable zone to which the vehicle has moved is in an AT state, the light may start to light up from that point on.

[4-7. Limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent the advantageous zone from continuing too long and becoming excessively gambling-oriented, it is possible to set an upper limit (restriction) on the period during which the advantageous zone continues. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter." In this embodiment, the end of the advantageous zone by such a limiter is described as the execution of a limit process or the activation of a limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Game number limiter)
The game number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of games (number of plays) in the advantageous zone reaches "1500". For example, the advantageous zone game number counter described later starts counting when the advantageous zone starts, and increments the count by one each time one play is played. Then, based on the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous zone is forcibly ended (for example, even if the play period of the AT state remains) and a transition is made to a non-advantageous zone. Note that the number of games that activates the game number limiter can be set to any number of games as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "1500". In addition, when the requirements of such a game number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be appropriately changed accordingly. In addition, it may be a type that gradually suppresses gambling according to the number of games in the advantageous zone.

(Payout limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone reaches "2400". For example, the favorable zone payout number counter described later starts counting when the favorable zone starts, and adds the corresponding number of medals each time a medal is paid out (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). Then, based on the value of the favorable zone payout number counter reaching a specified value (e.g., "2400" or more), the favorable zone is forcibly ended (e.g., even if the game period in the AT state remains), and the zone is shifted to a non-favorable zone. Note that the payout number at which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any payout number as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "2400". In addition, when the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be appropriately changed accordingly. In addition, it may be a type that gradually suppresses gambling according to the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone.

Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may be configured to count the positive amount from the most recent lowest point, with the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous zone as the lowest point (starting point) (i.e., the count is subtracted if there is no payout). In other words, the payout number limiter may be configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when a maximum of "2400" medals have been paid out since the medals increase during the advantageous zone (for example, when the AT state begins). Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may simply count the actual payout number (i.e., the number of medals paid out without subtracting the number of bets from the number of medals), rather than the net increase mentioned above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute the limit processing of the advantageous zone using only the game count limiter, may execute the limit processing of the advantageous zone using only the payout number limiter, or may execute the limit processing of the advantageous zone using both the game count limiter and the payout number limiter. Note that when both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous zone when the activation condition of either one of the limiters is satisfied after the advantageous zone has started.

The types of limiters are not limited to the game count limiter and payout number limiter described above. For example, a navigation count limiter may be provided that executes limit processing when the number of times push order minor roles are navigated during the AT state (i.e., the number of times information on stop operations advantageous to the player is notified for roles related to the payout of medals) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., "400" times). In other words, as long as gambling can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute limit processing using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External Signals]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to be capable of outputting a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display device can also perform the bonus state performance linked thereto. Also, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, turned off based on the end of the BB state, turned on based on the start of the MB state, and turned off based on the end of the MB state, the external data display device can not only perform the above-mentioned bonus state performance, but also count the number of bonuses by type.

Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when an AT state is started, and turned off when the AT state is ended, then an AT state performance linked to this can be performed on the external data display.Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a specific AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is ended, and external signal 2 is turned on when a specific AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is ended, then not only can the external data display perform the above-mentioned AT state performance, but the number of ATs can be counted by type.

For example, if the AT state is configured as an AT state managed by the number of sets, and external signal 1 is turned on when the first set of the AT state starts, and external signal 2 is turned on each time the second set and subsequent sets start, the number of first hits in the AT state and the number of times the AT state is extended can be counted on the external data display. The timing for turning on and off each external signal can be set as appropriate. In other words, as long as the situation is properly recognized by the external data display or hall computer, the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, various conditions can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state until it turns off again, such as a predetermined time, during one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. Commands]
As described above, the slot machine 1 is designed to be capable of transmitting multiple types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that the slot machine 1 does not allow the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to communicate with each other, and is required to communicate only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to transmit information (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200 at appropriate times to notify the sub-control circuit 200 of changes in the state of the slot machine 1. An example of such a command will be described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub-control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify the setting value, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of bets, etc. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command includes parameters that specify the internal winning role, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command includes parameters that specify the content of the lock effect, etc. Also, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command includes parameters that specify that the rotation of the reels has started, etc.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is sent. The reel stop command is configured to include parameters that specify the reel to be stopped and the position where the reel is stopped. Also, for example, when all reels are stopped and the displayed role (winning activation flag) is confirmed, a winning activation command is sent. The winning activation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of displayed role and the content of the bonus to be granted. Also, for example, when a favorable zone is started, a favorable zone start command is sent. The favorable zone start command is configured to include parameters that specify the start of the favorable zone and the mode (game state), etc. Also, for example, when a favorable zone is ended, a favorable zone end command is sent. The favorable zone end command is configured to include parameters that specify the end of the favorable zone and the cause of the end. Also, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is sent. The settlement command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns, etc. Note that these are merely examples, and commands other than these can be sent as necessary, and unnecessary commands among these can be not sent.

[4-10. Direction］
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, in order to increase the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to realize the intended gameplay, various effects are executed using various effect devices. An example of such a presentation will now be described.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 (main side) can control the following effects, for example. As described above, the slot machine 1 can notify the user of information on the stop operation by the instruction monitor, and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Rock performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect may be performed in which the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time (the game operation of the player is disabled for a predetermined period of time). Such an effect is called a "lock effect (or simply "lock")" or a "freeze effect (or simply "freeze")". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a lock effect is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of lock effects are performed.

The gaming operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, if a start operation is invalidated for a specified period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a specified period of time after all stop operations have been performed. For example, if a stop operation is invalidated for a specified period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a specified period of time after a start operation has been performed. If multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which the game progress is stopped (the period during which the player's gaming operation is invalidated) and the type of gaming operation to be invalidated may be set for each lock effect.

(Reel production)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be performed by the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (including not only the variable display mode but also a combination with the stopped display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such effects are called "reel effects" as well as "symbol effects", etc. Note that it is possible to configure the machine so that such reel effects are not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, when it is said that "a lock effect is performed (executed)", this also includes both cases where a reel effect is performed and cases where it is not performed.

In short, the reel effects are produced by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's input during a period in which the player's input is disabled. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern that performs such an output operation without considering the rotation speed or the maximum number of sliding pieces. Furthermore, by setting multiple operation patterns, multiple types of reel effects can be provided. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects with multiple types of lock effects, an even wider variety of output patterns can be set. Note that only one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effects.

(Pseudo-game)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a performance in which a pseudo game is performed during the execution of the above-mentioned lock performance can be performed. Such a performance is called a "pseudo game." It is possible to configure the machine so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, when "a lock performance is performed (executed)," it also includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where it is not performed.

In short, pseudo-games accept the player's game operations in a pseudo manner during a period in which the player's game operations are invalid, and perform effects by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In other words, the above-mentioned reel effects are further performed by intervening the player's game operations. Note that, for example, the MAX BET button 6a, 1 BET button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and settlement button 9, etc. are basically provided for the purpose of game operations, and therefore it is not desirable to use them for any other purpose. However, pseudo-games allow these operations to be accepted, on the premise that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistaking that they are playing an actual game.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be described with an example. The pseudo game is carried out, for example, in the following manner.
(1) The player's actual start operation (when the execution conditions are met, the pseudo game begins)
(2) Each reel rotates in a simulated manner (during simulated play)
(3) Accepts a pseudo-stop operation, which temporarily stops each reel (during pseudo play)
(4) After a random delay process, the reels actually start spinning (the simulated game ends and the actual game begins).

The random delay process is a process that randomly generates a delay period for each reel before starting its rotation (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period") to correct the situation where, for example, if certain symbols are displayed in a line in the above situation (3) and the reels start to rotate normally in the above situation (4), the player may be more likely to use the certain symbols as a landmark to stop the reels (this may be an aid to the so-called "eye-pressing" technique). In addition, when the reels are temporarily stopped in the above situations (3) and (4), it is desirable to ensure that the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always less than a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) so that the reels are alternately changed between forward and reverse directions, so that they are not mistaken for being completely stopped.

One of the above-mentioned measures, for example, is to slightly vibrate (swing) each reel up and down when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situation (3) (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and then all reels are temporarily stopped) until the random delay process is started in the above-mentioned situation (4). Note that, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging may not be performed when the first reel is temporarily stopped and when the second reel is temporarily stopped.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo game lamp is provided to notify the player that a pseudo game is being played, and the pseudo game lamp is turned on from when the pseudo game starts in the above-mentioned (1) situation until the random delay process starts in the above-mentioned (4) situation. The pseudo game lamp is preferably installed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operation and in a position that is visible during the game. The pseudo game lamp is preferably an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and the entire display unit of the pseudo game lamp is preferably covered with a monochromatic border. The pseudo game lamp is preferably such that the display range, including the explanatory portion of the pseudo game lamp, has a certain surface area (for example, one side is more than 10 mm and the surface area is more than 642 square mm, etc.). In addition, it is preferable that the description of the pseudo game lamp is written so that it can be recognized that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp to notify that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREE PLAY", "pseudo game performance in progress", or "automatic reel performance in progress"), and it is preferable that such description occupies at least 1/3 of the surface area. Note that the pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game display to inform the player that a pseudo-game is being played may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) from the start of the pseudo-game in the above-mentioned (1) situation until the start of the random delay process in the above-mentioned (4) situation. The pseudo-game display is preferably displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operation and at a position that is visible during the game (in this embodiment, since both the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are above the operation unit, either one may be used). In addition, it is preferable that the display range of the pseudo-game display, including its explanatory portion, has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm when the display screen is less than 7 inches, and the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen when the display screen is 7 inches or more). Additionally, it is desirable for the explanatory portion of the pseudo-play display to be written in a way that makes it clear that the pseudo-play display is intended to inform the player that a pseudo-play is in progress (for example, "FREE PLAY," "pseudo-play performance in progress," or "automatic reel performance in progress"), and it is desirable for the explanatory portion to be large enough for the player to read without being obscured or otherwise hidden.

Also, for example, during the pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the above-mentioned situation (1) to the start of the random delay processing in the above-mentioned situation (4)), it is desirable to configure so that information on the stop operation is not notified on the instruction monitor (if it is necessary to display information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay processing is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from misunderstanding that an actual game is being played during the pseudo game. Note that, if any of the above measures are taken, during the pseudo game, information on the stop operation may be notified on the sub-side presentation device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220). Similarly, during the pseudo game, the sub-side presentation device may perform a presentation according to the game result of the pseudo game (linked to the pseudo game operation).

In addition, in an actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output through the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during a pseudo game, a test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is not output. Therefore, during a pseudo game, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be output to enable the test machine to recognize that a pseudo game is being played. In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, the first interface board 301 may output a signal for controlling the pseudo game progress to the main control board 71 so that the pseudo game progresses on the main control board 71 side (i.e., the first interface board 301 for the test machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine is provided with such a pseudo game progress function, a switch capable of switching the function on and off may be provided. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to check the content of the simulated game during the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the slot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side) can control the following effects, for example. As described above, the slot machine 1 can notify the player of information on the stop operation by the main display device 210, etc., and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a performance that is completed in the current game (i.e., ends in one game) can be performed. This type of performance is called a "normal performance" or a "single-shot performance". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a normal performance is not performed, or to configure the machine so that multiple types of normal performances can be performed.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a performance that continues over a number of games (i.e., continues for a number of games) can be performed. Such a performance is called a "continuous performance" or a "continuous performance". It is possible to configure the machine so that such a continuous performance is not performed, or to configure the machine so that a number of types of continuous performance can be performed.

(Operation-linked effects)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is established, an effect can be performed in which the effect content can be changed according to the effect operation of the player. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect" or a "button effect" or the like. Note that it is possible to configure the device so that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or to configure the device so that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. In addition, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect, or as a continuous effect. In addition, the effect operation can include not only an operation on the effect button group, but also various game operations.

The various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, they can be used to suggest or notify the set value, internal lottery role, game status, game section, bonus content, and the period until the bonus is granted. They can also be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage of these. These uses are merely examples.

(Other performances)
In the pachislot machine 1, it is also possible to perform effects other than the various effects described above. For example, various notifications (e.g., addiction prevention notification, loss prevention notification, error state notification, demo state notification, etc.) to players or gaming establishments that are used for purposes other than those described above are also included in the effects in a broad sense. The addiction prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued when the advantageous zone ends. The loss prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued when the advantageous zone ends or when a settlement operation is performed. The error state notification can be, for example, a warning or the like that is issued from the time an error occurs until it is resolved. The demo state notification can be, for example, a notification that the machine is vacant when a period of no play reaches a predetermined period or when a settlement operation is performed.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, referring to Figures 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications related to the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine". Note that, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to those described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, and, further, with respect to the various specifications and functions described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, a part or all of them can be applied to those described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be the invention according to this embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the "center line" mentioned above. In addition, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as gaming states. In addition, the non-bonus state includes a 2BB flag interval in which the "F_2BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in the two-coin bet state. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") described below is carried over, a 3BB flag interval in which the "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in the three-coin bet state. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") described below is carried over, and a non-flag interval in which no bonus role has been won (not carried over). In addition, the bonus state includes a 2BB state to which a transition occurs in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 2BB, and a 3BB state to which a transition occurs in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 3BB.

The first gaming machine allows players to play with two medals bet (two-bet state) and three medals bet (three-bet state). Note that "betting" includes the player inserting two or three medals into the medal insertion slot 5 for play, the player operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to bet two or three medals from credits, and the player automatically betting two or three medals when a replay role is won.

[5-1. Gaming characteristics of the first gaming machine]
Next, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 5 to 8. Note that Figure 5 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone in the first gaming machine, Figure 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine, and Figures 7 and 8 are diagrams showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the states in which the player plays are broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones, and the advantageous zones are further divided into presentation zones (advantageous zones, normal play) and increase zones (advantageous zones, pseudo bonus). The non-advantageous zones are game states (non-AT states) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. The presentation zones are game states (non-AT states) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are game states that are disadvantageous to the player, similar to the non-advantageous zones, but differ from the non-advantageous zones in that mode transitions are performed, as described below.

In other words, the non-advantageous zone is the control state in the initial state that is controlled when play in the advantageous zone ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the machine is shipped from the factory, etc., and the performance zone is the control state in the normal state in which the player plays normally, making it possible to vary the expectation of transitioning to the increased zone (awarding) by mode transitions, etc.

On the other hand, the increase section is a game state (AT state) in which information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is an advantageous game state for the player. In other words, the increase section is a control state that is an advantageous state in which the player can increase the number of medals. Note that both the performance section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by transitioning between these sections, a series of advantageous sections are formed.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous zone, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described later). The sub-flag is information for grouping internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not they are lottery-eligible roles and their winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries related to playability by the main control circuit 100 (various processes related to the advantageous zone) and assigning the same information to the group, making it possible to identify the group. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning role, making it possible to compress the amount of data and avoid straining the capacity of the main ROM 102. In the non-advantageous zone, a lottery is held using this non-advantageous zone sub-flag.

The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Rip Bell" is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to "33"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Determined Cherry" (No. "6") and "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "middle cherry" is determined when the internal winning role is "F_middle Cherry" (No. "7"). Note that the non-advantageous zone can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined, just like the advantageous zone. Furthermore, the correspondence between these is not limited to the above.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described below). Furthermore, in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed. In the advantageous zone, a lottery is held using these sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous zone and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone.

The sub-flag "Bell" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is any of "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "Weak Cherry" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "Watermelon" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "Definite Role" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Definite Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The sub-flag "Middle Cherry" when the advantageous zone is won is determined when the internal winning role is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu-Rip 1" when entering the favorable zone is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the symbol combination "Right Up Rip" is displayed (i.e., the winning role is "Right Up Rip"). The sub-flag "Tsu-Rip 2" when entering the favorable zone is determined when the internal winning role is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the symbol combination "Parallel Rip" is displayed (i.e., the winning role is "Parallel Rip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as described below, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), a "Right-Rising Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 3BB flags, and a "Parallel Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 2BB flags and non-flags.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone between 3BB flags, and "Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone between 2BB flags and non-flags. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag when the player enters the advantageous zone differs in this way, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below (for example, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) and the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f)) is changed.

In the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is used as an example of a role in which the sub-flag changes when the player enters a favorable zone depending on whether the player is between 3BB flags or 2BB flags, but the manner in which the sub-flag changes when the player enters a favorable zone is not limited to this. For example, as described below, when the internal winning role is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different between the 3BB flag and the 2BB flag. Therefore, when such a role is won, the number of medals paid out may not change (or may change), but the combination of the displayed symbols may be different, and a different sub-flag may be determined when the player enters a favorable zone. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be changed depending on the difference in the sub-flag when the player enters a favorable zone.

Also, for example, as described below, when the internal winning role is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag interval (non-flag interval) it is, if the pressing position (stop operation timing) is appropriate, the "watermelon" symbol combination is displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a miss occurs and the "watermelon spill" symbol combination is displayed. Therefore, when such a role is won, different sub-flags for winning the advantageous zone may be determined depending on whether a win is achieved without a miss or whether a miss occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be changed depending on whether the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is different.

Also, for example, when the internal winning role is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), if the stopping operation is performed in a specific manner (this specific manner may be, for example, a manner in which the stopping operation is performed in a predefined hitting order (correct pressing order), a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stopping operation) is appropriate, or a manner in which a combination of these is performed) between the 3BB flags, a combination of symbols of "parallel replay" is displayed, and if the stopping operation is not performed in the specific manner, a combination of symbols of "right-up replay" is displayed, and different sub-flags for when the player enters the advantageous zone may be determined based on this. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be varied depending on the different sub-flags for when the player enters the advantageous zone.

In other words, the first gaming machine allows the final stop display mode for a specific combination to differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, and allows different secondary information to be determined according to different stop display modes, thereby applying all the modes that allow the degree of advantage to be changed.

Returning to the description of the playability of the first gaming machine, in the non-advantageous zone, a lottery for transition to the advantageous zone is held for each game. Specifically, the advantageous zone transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(b) is referenced, an internal winning combination is determined, and at a predetermined timing during the game after the non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination, the transition mode, etc. is determined according to the non-play zone sub-flag. Note that, when making this determination, there are cases where only the type of mode when transitioning to the advantageous zone is determined (in FIG. 5, "Advantageous Zone Start"), and cases where not only the type of mode but also a transition to a pseudo bonus is determined (in FIG. 5, "Advantageous Zone Start + Pseudo Bonus Start"). However, it is also possible to configure the specification so that a transition to a pseudo bonus is not determined in the non-advantageous zone.

Now, referring to FIG. 6, the various modes in the first gaming machine will be described. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may also be referred to as the game state or control state) for varying the expectation of a transition (award) to an increase zone (pseudo bonus) in the presentation zone (normal play), and in the presentation zone (normal play), it is according to this mode that a decision is made as to whether or not a pseudo bonus transition will occur, whether an advantageous zone will be maintained, or whether the advantageous zone will end and a transition will be made to a non-advantageous zone.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode in which a player is likely to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone (performance zone), and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) described below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) described below). Although not shown in the figure, in the start mode, the ceiling game number is set to "965 games." The ceiling game number is used to forcibly transition to a pseudo bonus when a certain period of time has elapsed without transitioning to a pseudo bonus. Therefore, the smaller the ceiling game number, the more advantageous it is for the player, and the higher the ceiling game number, the more disadvantageous it is for the player.

The normal A mode is the mode in which players are most likely to stay when playing, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, so the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7 (c) described below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8 (f) described below). In the normal A mode, the ceiling game number is set to "965 games". In addition, in FIG. 6, "approximately 999G after pseudo bonus" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, the game transitions to the end A mode or end B mode described below, and 32 games are played in that mode without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and after transitioning to a non-advantageous zone once, if the normal A mode is selected when transitioning from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone, the apparent ceiling game number is "965 games" + the play period "32 games" in the end A mode or end B mode + the number of games required to transition from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone, so this is expressed. The same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normal B mode is a mode in which players tend to stay relatively easily while playing, and although it is a relatively disadvantageous mode, it is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In the Heaven Preparation Mode, the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) below), but the ceiling number of games is set at 466 games, and if a transition is made to a pseudo bonus, it is guaranteed that the mode will transition to Heaven Mode after the end of the pseudo bonus (see Figure 8 (f) below), making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense.

In Chance mode, the expectation of moving to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "222 games," so in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of moving to Heaven mode is not high (see Figure 8 (f) below).

End A mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to remain if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, and the expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is the lowest (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expected probability of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In End A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone.

End B mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to stay if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, but it is more favorable than end A mode, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the expectation of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) below). In end B mode, like end A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone. End A mode and end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end modes".

The guaranteed mode is the mode in which you stay when Heaven C mode ends, and since the expectation of moving to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of moving to Heaven mode is not high (see FIG. 8(f) below). In other words, in order to prevent a drop in interest when Heaven C mode ends, the guaranteed mode is positioned as one that aims to maintain (guarantee) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time.

Heaven A mode is a mode where you can expect a series of pseudo bonuses (if the AT state is continued by a decision to extend (add) during the AT state, this may also include the extension (addition) of the AT state. The same applies below), and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level, making it a relatively advantageous mode. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, a setting difference can be set for this ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the setting value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the setting value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the lottery value can be set so that the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%, or the lottery value can be set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to the heaven B mode and heaven C mode described later, and a setting difference can be set for the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to appear consecutively, the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which pseudo bonuses can be expected to appear consecutively, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see FIG. 7(c) below). The ceiling number of games is set to "32 games." Also, it is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set quite high. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is a more advantageous mode than heaven A mode and heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode."

Note that the above modes are merely examples, and the mode configuration is not limited to these. Modes other than the above modes can be set, and some of the above modes can be chosen not to be set.

Up to this point, the non-advantageous zone has been described as being in a state where the degree of advantage is relatively low compared to the advantageous zone, but the relationship between the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone is not limited to this. For example, the non-advantageous zone may have a higher transition rate to the increasing zone than the advantageous zone when at least one mode is set, or the average number of games required to transition to the increasing zone may be shorter, or the non-advantageous zone may be the zone that is most likely to become the increasing zone. By doing so, an incentive to play is created even in a state where it is confirmed that the zone is a non-advantageous zone after a setting change, etc., so that it is a motivation to start playing even from the time the store opens. Even if the zone lamp stops lighting when 32 games have passed after the pseudo bonus ends, it is not confirmed that the zone is in the most disadvantageous state, so that it is a motivation to continue playing even in such a case. Up to this point, the performance zone has been described as a game state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, but if it is in a state that is disadvantageous compared to the increasing zone (for example, by lowering the frequency of notification or changing the role that is the subject of notification), it can also be a game state in which information on a stop operation is notified.

Returning to the description of the playability of the first gaming machine, in the performance section (normal play), first, for each play, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed by referring to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) is referred to, an internal winning role is determined, and at a predetermined timing during the play after the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the internal winning role, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In FIG. 7(c), "non-winning" means that there is no transition to a pseudo bonus, "winning (current play)" means that there is a transition to a pseudo bonus from the current play, and "winning (next play)" means that there is a transition to a pseudo bonus from the next play.

In the first gaming machine, if a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, game operations (stop operations) are invalidated for a certain period of time at the start of the current game, and if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, at the start of the next game. During this invalid period, a reel effect in which "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 (a "red 7s aligned" effect) is performed, and then a pseudo bonus is started. In a game in which a "red 7s aligned" effect is performed, if it is necessary to notify information about the stop operation, the information about the stop operation is notified at least when the invalid period ends and game operations (stop operations) become valid (it may be before that, but not before the timing when the random delay process described above is started).

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) in the performance section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn. Note that this transition mode may be a mode including the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Also, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur and a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), mode transition lottery (when winning), and mode transition lottery (when reaching the ceiling) described below are not held.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play), then for each play (more specifically, in a play in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is drawn), a pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a win occurs) is held by referring to the sub-flag when entering a favorable zone. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c) is referenced to determine the winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during the play (before the start of the next play) after the sub-flag when entering a favorable zone is determined according to the winning combination, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag when entering a favorable zone.

In the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), the probability of deciding to transition to a pseudo bonus is higher when "Tsū Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsū Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsū Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsū Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsū Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, but when "Tsū Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent a transition to a pseudo bonus from being determined.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) in the performance section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. Note that this transition mode may be a mode including the mode during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Also, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur and a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held, the mode transition lottery (when ceiling) described below is not held.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f), the probability of deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher when "Tsū-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsū-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsū-Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsū-Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsū-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that the player will be transitioned to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, but when "Tsū-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent the player from deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play), the ceiling game number is updated (this can be by addition or subtraction), and if the ceiling game number reaches the ceiling game number associated with the current mode (or determined in advance when transitioning to a favorable section, etc.), a transition to a pseudo bonus is determined. In this case, it is possible to always determine a "winning lottery (current play)," or it is also possible to always determine a "winning lottery (next play)." It is also possible to have either of these be determined by lottery.

When the ceiling number of games is reached during the presentation section (normal play) and it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referenced, and the mode to transition to is determined according to the current mode. This mode to transition to may be a mode including the mode during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

The processing related to the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) and the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest of the processing is the same, so they can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.The processing related to the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) and the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest of the processing is the same, so they can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.

Also, if "Winning lottery (played this time)" is not set as a type of pseudo bonus winning lottery, then at the time the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is determined, the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone has already been determined, and the ceiling game number can also be updated, so the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), and the pseudo bonus transition processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed together in a single process. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (when winning), the mode transition lottery (when winning), and the mode transition lottery (when the ceiling is reached) can also be performed together in a single process.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine, as described above, in the presentation section (normal play), if it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus and the pseudo bonus starts (in FIG. 5, "pseudo bonus start"), the game transitions to the increase section (pseudo bonus). Also, as described above, in the presentation section (normal play), if it is controlled to end A mode or end B mode and 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo bonus (in FIG. 5, "end of advantageous section (via ends A and B)"), the game transitions to a non-advantageous section. Also, if the conditions for the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described below are met, the advantageous section will be forcibly ended (in FIG. 5, "end of advantageous section (limit processing)"), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is held when the pseudo bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e) is referenced, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the ceiling number of games after the pseudo bonus ends depending on the current mode. In FIG. 8(e), "non-winning" means that the ceiling number of games will not be shortened, and "winning (updated ceiling number of games = 0)" means that the ceiling number of games set will be set to "0" (shortened) after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. The ceiling shortening lottery can be held not only when the pseudo bonus starts, but also every time the pseudo bonus is played.

If the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will not be shortened, and if the player does not have a 1G consecutive stock (described below) when the pseudo bonus ends, the ceiling game number will be set according to the current mode (in the case of the end mode, the advantageous zone ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so the ceiling game number is not set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus ends (in FIG. 5, "pseudo bonus end"), and the performance zone (normal play) begins. On the other hand, if the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will be shortened, the ceiling game number will be set to "0 games" when the pseudo bonus ends. This means that the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, the pseudo bonus will start when the ceiling game number is reached, so the mode transition lottery (at ceiling) described above will be performed.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is held for each game (more specifically, in a game in which the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn is determined to be "guaranteed role" or "medium chain"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn. Note that the transition mode may also be determined when a sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn other than the above. In this case, in principle, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the transition mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referenced.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referenced, and the mode to transition to is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won. In this case, as with the above, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the mode to transition to, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referenced.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive draw is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive draw table shown in FIG. 7(d) is referenced, and whether or not a 1G consecutive draw will occur is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag when the advantageous section is drawn or the sub-flag when the advantageous section is won. In FIG. 7(d), "non-win" means that a 1G consecutive draw will not occur, and "win (1G consecutive + 1)" means that one right to generate a 1G consecutive draw (1G consecutive stock) is granted (the 1G consecutive stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that multiple 1G consecutive stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (accumulated) by the 1G consecutive stock counter. Therefore, multiple 1G consecutive stocks may be granted during one pseudo bonus. The 1G consecutive draw table can also be configured so that multiple 1G consecutive stocks can be granted in one 1G consecutive draw.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or more (i.e., if you have 1G consecutive stock), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is decremented by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus starts according to the right of 1G consecutive stock, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not held. On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more (i.e., if you do not have 1G consecutive stock), and if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the ceiling game number is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous period ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus ends (in FIG. 5, "pseudo bonus end"), and the game moves to the presentation period (normal game).

In addition, if a player wins the ceiling shortening lottery and also has 1G consecutive stocks, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery may be prioritized and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening may be executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks, or the 1G consecutive stocks may be prioritized and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks may be executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening. In the latter case, information that allows the existence of a ceiling shortening to be carried over may be stored separately.

In the first gaming machine, the configuration of the increase section (pseudo bonus) is given as an example in which it continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 coins can be obtained, but the configuration of the pseudo bonus is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo bonus may be configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)" and a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)" that continues for "22 games" and allows a maximum of 110 coins to be obtained may be installed. In this case, when it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus (to grant the right) in the pseudo bonus transition lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G consecutive lottery, the type (e.g., whether to select "pseudo BB" or "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (e.g., 50% each). In addition, the "pseudo RB" may have a different value from the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, a lower value than the "pseudo BB"). For example, the number of continuing games may be the same as the "pseudo BB", but the maximum number of coins that can be won may be different by lowering the Bernavi rate (probability of announcing information on a stop operation). When the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect may be performed in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed in line in the main display window 4, or a reel effect may be displayed in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuing games (play period) can be changed.

In addition, if the conditions for executing the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described below are met during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended ("End of advantageous zone due to limit processing" in FIG. 5), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous zone.

In the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is based on the premise that the game is basically played with three coins bet. Therefore, when playing with two coins bet, for example, various lotteries using (a)-(d) in FIG. 7 and (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 are not conducted, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. In addition, when playing with two coins bet during a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is not an increase period because the machine is configured so that medals do not increase when two coins are bet. In other words, the first gaming machine is basically configured so that the player is at a disadvantage when playing with two coins bet.

Here, when playing in the two-coin bet state, no lottery (for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc.) or processing (for example, updating of the ceiling number of games, etc.) is performed for the advantageous zone (AT), but it is desirable to update the advantageous zone game number counter for the game number limiter described above and the advantageous zone payout number counter for the payout number limiter described above. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone and the upper limit of the number of coins won. If these counters were not updated in the two-coin bet state, there may be cases where the upper limit of the number of games stayed in the advantageous zone or the number of coins won set by the intervention of play in the two-coin bet state, and as a result, gambling may not be appropriately suppressed. Therefore, it is desirable to configure the limiter counter so that it can be updated every game regardless of the number of coins bet.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically premised on the premise that the game is played in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in a bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7 and (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 are not conducted, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. In addition, when the bonus state is entered during a pseudo bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than in a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-bonus state with 3 medals bet), so the pseudo bonus may not be an increase period. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured so that playing in a bonus state may put the player at a disadvantage.

Therefore, the first gaming machine is configured to recommend playing in the 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags may be described as the "recommended gaming state", and other states may be described as the "non-recommended gaming state"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus role that can only be won in the 2-coin bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between 2BB flags only wins in the 2-coin bet state, and does not win in the 3-coin bet state. Also, 3BB is a bonus role that can only be won in the 3-coin bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between 3BB flags only wins in the 3-coin bet state, and does not win in the 2-coin bet state. Also, 3BB does not win between 2BB flags, and 2BB does not win between 3BB flags.

The first gaming machine uses these configurations to, for example, win 2BB (without winning 2BB) in a 2-coin bet state with no flags, making it a 2BB flag state, and then plays in a 3-coin bet state, making it possible to play in the recommended play state described above without worrying about winning a bonus role.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, a ceiling shortening lottery is held during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e), when the current mode is either the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, or the heaven C mode, there is a probability of 1/8 (32/256) of winning the ceiling shortening lottery, whereas in other modes, there is no winning the ceiling shortening lottery. In other words, in a mode where the ceiling game count is "32 games," the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games," and in a mode where the ceiling game count is greater than that, the ceiling game count is never shortened.

Even in the case of a mode in which the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," it may be determined that the ceiling number of games will be shortened with a lower probability (e.g., 1/64) than in the case of a mode in which the ceiling number of games is "32 games."

Furthermore, the manner in which the ceiling number of games is shortened is not limited to the above. For example, the same effect can be achieved by shortening "32 games" to a fewer number of games (0-31 games). Therefore, the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won may be determined, or the number of games to be shortened in the ceiling shortening lottery may be determined in advance.

The trigger for the ceiling shortening lottery is not limited to the above. For example, during a pseudo bonus, the ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous zone (normal play), when the current mode is any of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. In these cases, the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won or the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered may be referenced to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

As mentioned above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is held during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d), it can be seen that a 1G consecutive stock may be awarded regardless of the current mode. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be awarded regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling game count of "32 games" or not.

The manner in which the right is granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode in which the ceiling number of games is "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may not be conducted in consideration of the fact that a ceiling shortening lottery will be conducted, and in a mode in which the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may be conducted, thereby preventing the game from becoming excessively gambling-oriented.

The trigger for the 1G consecutive lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G consecutive lottery may be conducted in advantageous zones (performance zones) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G consecutive stocks accumulated as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the pseudo bonus starts or during the pseudo bonus, a special bonus performance is executed with a predetermined probability to suggest that the current mode is the heaven mode and that the player is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the special bonus performance is executed, the player can expect that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. This special bonus performance may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, when the special bonus performance is executed at the start of the pseudo bonus, it is suggested that the player is at least in the heaven mode, and the player can be made to have a sense of expectation that the ceiling shortening lottery may also be won. This special bonus performance may also be executed with a predetermined probability or 100% probability when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, various possibilities can be suggested, such as (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening lottery, (3) Heaven mode + 1G consecutive lottery, (4) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening lottery + 1G consecutive lottery, (5) 1G consecutive lottery only, etc., which can increase the interest of the game.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) will be controlled back to an advantageous state within a predetermined period (e.g., 32 games) after the end of the advantageous state (e.g., in the case of heaven mode), this period may be further shortened, so that even if the playing period of a series of advantageous zones is limited (e.g., when limit processing is executed), it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game by allowing the player to play in as advantageous a state as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not certain that the advantageous state will be restored within a predetermined period of time after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of end mode), the advantageous state may be restored by granting a right (for example, 1G consecutive stock), which can heighten the player's expectations and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won (i.e., when "F_Determined Cherry" or "F_Reach Eye" is determined as the internal winning role), and when the result of the mode transition lottery described above is that the mode transition to Heaven C mode is decided, a special lock effect can be executed with a probability of 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). Note that, even when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won (i.e., when "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning role), the player can receive the same benefit as when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, so when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, the special lock effect may be executed in the same way as when the sub-flag "Determined Role" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won.

Here, since the "fixed combination" is a combination that also determines the transition to the pseudo bonus (see FIG. 7(c)), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can recognize that the transition to the pseudo bonus and the transition to the Heaven C mode have occurred, which is very interesting for the player. The special lock effect is configured as an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalid for about 20 seconds at the start of the game, for example. During this time, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in reverse, or a special video that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. Also, a special song that is not normally output may be output. Of course, the effects may be performed by a combination of these. Also, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects may be performed until the player performs the next game operation (i.e., the player may decide whether to execute the effect to the end or to cancel it midway and continue the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16 described below, even if the player is in Heaven C mode, the advantageous zone may be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process, so it may not be desirable to execute the above-mentioned special lock effect multiple times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous zones. Specifically, when it is decided to execute the special lock effect for the first time within a series of advantageous zones, the special lock effect is executed, but thereafter, even if the same conditions are met within the same series of advantageous zones, the special lock effect is controlled not to be executed. As a method, when the special lock effect is executed once, information indicating that is stored, and when the information is stored within the same series of advantageous zones thereafter, the decision on whether or not to execute the special lock effect may not be made in the first place, or the decision may be made, but when the information is stored, even if the decision result indicates execution, it may be rewritten to indicate no execution. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous zone ends.

The manner in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit on the number of times the special lock effect can be executed may be set to "two times" or "three times" rather than "one time." In other words, the execution of the special lock effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set to multiple times. This can be set appropriately depending on the expected number of balls per special lock effect.

The conditions for determining whether or not to execute the special lock effect are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is triggered by the winning of a "fixed role", and a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode. However, since there may be cases where a transition to Heaven C mode is triggered by something other than the winning of a "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 8), a determination may be made as to whether or not to execute the special lock effect in these cases as well, and it may be determined that the special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (which may be the same probability as when the winning of a "fixed role" is the trigger, or may be a different probability).

For example, when a "guaranteed role" is won, a decision may first be made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock effect will be executed, a transition to Heaven C mode may occur. In other words, the special lock effect may be executed in response to a decision to transition to Heaven C mode, or a transition to Heaven C mode may be initiated in response to a decision to execute a special lock effect.

In addition, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the favorable zone may be used as a condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed. For example, when the value of the favorable zone game number counter or the control game number counter described below is less than "750", or when the value of the favorable zone payout counter or the control payout number counter described below is less than "1201", a determination as to whether or not the special lock effect is executed is made as described above, and when the value of the favorable zone game number counter or the control game number counter described below becomes "750" or more, or when the value of the favorable zone payout counter or the control payout number counter described below becomes "1201" or more, it is possible to prevent the determination of whether or not the special lock effect is executed in the same series of favorable zones thereafter.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the play period of a series of advantageous zones is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16 described below). Furthermore, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) is set multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, control is performed so that special effects (e.g., special lock effects) are not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game while preventing the game from becoming excessively gambling-like.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous zones, the winning of a specific role (e.g., a "fixed role") may trigger control to be established in an advantageous state (e.g., a pseudo bonus), and control information that is highly advantageous to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) may be set. Even if such an event occurs multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, control is performed so that a special effect (e.g., a special lock effect) is not performed each time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game while preventing the game from becoming excessively gambling-like.

The first gaming machine is also capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is won) according to the determined internal winning role, and is also capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is entered) according to the combination of symbols displayed, and is capable of determining whether or not to grant a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stopping operation is notified, according to the secondary information determined for each.

In this way, the first gaming machine can provide a sense of expectation regarding the award of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined, but also when a combination of symbols is displayed, thereby diversifying the gameplay regarding the award of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination are managed as common secondary information, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is a first amount (e.g., 3 coins), the first special role (e.g., 3BB) can be won, but the second special role (e.g., 2BB) cannot be won. In addition, when the gaming value bet is a second amount (e.g., 2 coins), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific role (e.g., "F_Replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags) is in effect, a combination of predetermined symbols (e.g., "Right-up replay") can be displayed, and if the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is in effect, a combination of specific symbols (e.g., "Parallel replay") can be displayed (see FIG. 15 described below).

The first gaming machine is capable of determining different secondary information when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. In other words, the first gaming machine can vary the content of the determination regarding the granting of an advantageous state depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific role is determined, and therefore can further diversify the gameplay while preventing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a specific winning combination is won.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are both combinations of symbols related to replay, the same privilege of activating replay is awarded regardless of which one is displayed.

The manner in which the same benefit is awarded is not limited to the above. For example, the specific role is configured as a specific minor role related to the award of game value. Then, when the specific minor role is won, for example, in the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined patterns (a combination of patterns related to the award of game value equivalent to a "right-up lip") that awards a game value of one coin (this value is arbitrary and may be another value less than the bet game value, or may be a value exceeding the bet game value) is displayed, and in the second special permission state, a combination of specific patterns (a combination of patterns related to the award of game value equivalent to a "parallel lip") that awards the same number of game values as when the combination of predetermined patterns is displayed is displayed.

In addition, both the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols may be configured as "miss" symbol combinations (however, in order to be able to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state, it is necessary to make it possible to distinguish that the combination of symbols is different from the case of a pure "miss"). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the decision content regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be varied depending on which special permission state is in place, even when the same specific role is determined, so that the gameplay can be diversified while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state. Furthermore, in a game in which a specific role has been determined, the same benefit is granted regardless of which special permission state is in place, so that even when the gameplay is varied, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a direct disadvantage.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won and the second special permission state is in effect, it may be configured so that it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, and not possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is not performed in the specific manner.

In addition, it may be possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a specific symbol combination is displayed. When a specific combination is determined as an internal winning role, it may be possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state different between when a specific symbol combination is displayed and when a specific symbol combination is not displayed.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, if the first special permission state is established, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the second special permission state is established, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode, and a combination of specific symbols may be displayed when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

In this case, the specific combination can be configured so that, on at least one reel, a specific symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stopping operation is appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position O" or "correct press position", etc.), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stopping operation is inappropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position X" or "incorrect press position", etc.). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (the timing), which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and increases the enjoyment of the game.

As mentioned above, the specific role can also be configured as a specific minor role. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the pressing position is ○), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded on at least one reel, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position is ×), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded. In this case, the specific number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). Also, the specific number may be awarded with a game value that is greater than the specific number. Also, the specific number may be awarded with a game value that is less than the specific number. Also, at least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the specific number or the specific number may be set to "0". This not only makes it possible to vary the degree of advantage in terms of granting an advantageous state based on the player's stopping operation (or the timing of that operation), but also makes it possible to vary the direct content of the bonus, allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and further diversifying the gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if there is only one type of specific role, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple specific roles with different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, a first specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the second timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third specific role is provided in which, when the timing of the stop operation is a third timing different from the first timing and the second timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these roles are set to win with the same probability of winning.

In this case, the special role can be configured so that a combination of specific symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (when the button press order is correct), and a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed when the batting order is inappropriate (when the button press order is incorrect). This allows the degree of advantage in terms of the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (procedure), allowing the player to concentrate more on the game, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

The specific role can also be configured as a specific minor role as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (when the push order is correct), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded, and when the batting order is not appropriate (when the push order is incorrect), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values is awarded. In this case, the specific number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). The specific number may be awarded with a game value that is greater than the specific number. The specific number may be awarded with a game value that is less than the specific number. At least one of the combination of specific symbols and the combination of specific symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the specific number or the specific number may be set to "0". This not only changes the degree of advantage regarding the award of an advantageous state due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also changes the content of the direct benefit, so that the player can concentrate more on the game, and the gameplay can be further diversified, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific role, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple specific roles with different appropriate batting orders. For example, a first specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the left, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the center or right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the center, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the left or right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third specific role is provided in which, when the first stop is on the right, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the first stop is on the left or center, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and a combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these roles are set to win with the same probability of winning.

So far, we have mentioned that in a unit game in which a specific combination has been won, the process of determining whether a non-advantageous zone will transition to an advantageous zone and the process of determining whether an advantageous state will be granted in an advantageous zone (including pseudo bonus transition lotteries, mode transition lotteries, and other processes for changing the degree of advantage of the game situation in an advantageous zone) change due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order). However, among such changes, any change that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may ultimately result in an disadvantage) can be considered as the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the configuration may be such that any presentation (warning notification) can be generated to call the player's attention.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, the possibility of an advantageous state being awarded is higher when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. In other words, assuming that three coins are bet, the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is a state in which the award of an advantageous state is favored more than the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a predetermined role (for example, the "push order bell B" described below) is won, if the first special permission state is selected, the combination of symbols to be awarded (for example, a combination of symbols that will pay out 8 coins) is displayed regardless of the batting order, while if the second special permission state is selected, if the batting order is the predefined correct push order, the combination of symbols to be awarded is displayed, but if the batting order is not the predefined correct push order, the combination of symbols to be awarded is not displayed, resulting in a miss where no game value is awarded, or a combination of symbols to which less game value is awarded than when the combination of symbols to be awarded is displayed (for example, a combination of symbols that will pay out 1 coin) is displayed. In other words, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the award of game value is favored more than the second special permission state.

In other words, if a player plays in a 3-coin bet state between 3BB flags even in a non-recommended play state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is not favored, but the probability of obtaining a play value when an advantageous state is not activated is favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in the slope value between when an advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively small. In this way, a state in which the player's play value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility of the player being able to suddenly increase the play value, is reduced, can be defined as, for example, a "stable state."

On the other hand, if a player plays in the recommended game state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is favored, but the probability of obtaining game value when the advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in the slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is more likely to be able to rapidly increase his or her game value, but in which the player's game value is likely to decrease, can be defined as, for example, a "rough seas state."

Here, the method of creating the two states, the stable state and the rough sea state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state", the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is increased in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above compared to the "rough sea state", while the transition probability of the heaven mode is decreased in the mode transition lottery described above compared to the "rough sea state". Also, in the "rough sea state", the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is decreased in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above compared to the "stable state", while the transition probability of the heaven mode is increased in the mode transition lottery described above compared to the "stable state". In this way, in the "stable state", a state can be created in which it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but difficult to win consecutive wins, and in the "rough sea state", a state can be created in which it is difficult to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but easy to win consecutive wins. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined role may vary between the 2BB flag and the 3BB flag, or may be different from this (i.e., not favoring the 3BB flag).

[5-2. Symbol Arrangement Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first gaming machine, ten types of symbols, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "white blank 1" and "white blank 2", are arranged in the positions shown in Fig. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Also, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal lottery winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figs. 10 to 15. Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Figs. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination of the first gaming machine. That is, the following will explain the type of internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine, and which symbol combination (which can also be referred to as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) is displayed according to the stop operation mode (i.e., the hitting order, the stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described below, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "Corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. 10. Also, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a symbol combination related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a symbol combination related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a symbol combination related to a minor role.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning role when playing in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) with 2 bets, but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning role when playing in a 3 bet state. In a game in which "F_2BB" wins in a 2 bet state or a game in which it is a "lose" between 2BB flags, if the pressed position for each reel is ○, "BB01" is displayed and the state transitions to 2BB state (bonus state based on 2BB). On the other hand, in a 3 bet state, even between 2BB flags, "BB01" is not displayed.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning role when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) with three bets, but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning role when a game is played in a two bet state. In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a three bet state, or in a game in which a "lose" occurs between 3BB flags, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, "BB02" is displayed and the game transitions to the 3BB state (bonus state based on 3BB). On the other hand, in a two bet state, even between 3BB flags, "BB02" is not displayed.

In the 2BB and 3BB states, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referenced to determine the internal winning combination (only three coins can be bet to start playing). In the 2BB and 3BB states, the RB, which is a first-class special combination, is always in operation (RB state). The RB state is repeatedly controlled to end once and then activate again if two wins occur or two games are played after it is activated. In the first gaming machine, the end condition for the 2BB state is stipulated as more than one medal being paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition for the 3BB state is stipulated as more than 176 medals being paid out in the 3BB state.

Here, when the 2BB state or 3BB state ends, a special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode when transitioning to the bonus state (same as when the bonus state ends, since no mode transition occurs during the bonus state), i.e. the current mode, is "start mode", the mode to transition to will be "start mode". Also, if the current mode is either "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", or "chance mode", the mode to transition to will be "normal A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the mode to transition to will be "end A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", or "heaven C mode", the mode to transition to will be "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and 2BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, any of "REP64" to "REP72" (these are collectively called "parallel reps" because they display the "replay" symbols in a straight line in the lower row or in the middle row. Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively called "lower row reps" and "REP72" can be called "middle row reps") is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, "REP73" (this is a replay symbol that displays the "replay" symbols in a straight line to the right, so it can be called a "right-up reps") is displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in a three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in a two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, a "parallel replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in either state, and a replay is granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle row replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push position is ○ on at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" (these can be collectively referred to as "cherry replays" since they display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other replays (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is awarded.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Definite Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that, while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle row replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are used to display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L, and since symbols that can increase the player's expectations, such as "REP42", are also displayed on other reels), a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the button is pressed at an X position, other replies (such as the above-mentioned "Cherry rep" or "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed and a replay is granted. Also, if the button is pressed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", a "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_middle cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. It can be configured so that it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, but not determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the push position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are collectively referred to as "middle cherry lip" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the middle of the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other lips (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. Additionally, if the push order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle lip" will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay will be granted.

In the non-bonus state, "F_Reach Eye" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role regardless of the number of bets. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning role in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning role in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, in the two-coin bet state, a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode in the two-coin bet state, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4," any of "REP01" to "REP14" (these are configured as combinations of symbols that can, by convention, definitely notify (or suggest) a transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "Reach Eye Lip") is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is awarded. Also, if the push order is any of "batting order 5" and "batting order 6," a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

In a non-bonus state, "F_watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the push position for each reel is ○, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these are collectively called "watermelon" because they display "watermelon" symbols side by side) is displayed, and if three coins are bet, three medals are paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, one of "FRU08" and "FRU09" (these are collectively called "watermelon spill" because they do not display "watermelon" symbols side by side) is displayed, and one medal is paid out. Note that if the push position is ×, it can also be configured so that a spill occurs and zero medals are paid out.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning roles in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor role with six options (one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct push order), and if it is determined as the internal winning role, and the stopping operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the following "bells" will be displayed: "Downward Right Bell" ("FRU03"), "Top Row Bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02"), "Middle Row Bell" ("FRU04"), "Upward Right Bell" ("FRU05"), "Small Hill Bell" ("FRU06"), and "Bottom Row Bell" ("FRU07"). If three coins are bet, eight medals will be paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the remaining stop operations will have a press position of ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1 coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the remaining stop operations will have a press position of ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1 coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" are configured to be determined as internal winning roles in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor role between the 3BB flags in the 2-coin bet state and the 3-coin bet state. If it is determined to be an internal winning role, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the 3-coin bet state is selected, 8 medals are paid out, and if the 2-coin bet state is selected, 2 medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 15, the "Push Order Bell B" is a push order minor role in states other than between 3BB flags in the 3-coin bet state (between non-flags in the 3-coin bet state, between 2BB flags in the 3-coin bet state), and when it is determined as an internal winning role, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed and 8 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct push order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operation will have a 1/2 probability of being a push position O, and if the push position is O, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is X, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, the remaining stop operation will have a 1/8 probability of being a push position O, and if the push position is O, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is X, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out.

The "8 F_RB" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, one of the "bells" described above will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation mode, and 8 medals will be paid out.

The "F_RB 1 coin" is configured to be determined as an internal winning role in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning role, any of the above-mentioned "1 coin roles" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one medal is paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination tables shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 14, and the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations shown in FIG. 15 are merely examples, and are not limited to the modes shown here.

For example, in the first gaming machine, a "miss" may occur in various situations, such as when there is a pure "miss"; when in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed, "BB01" is missed and becomes a "miss"; when in a 3-bet state where "BB02" can be displayed, "miss" occurs when "BB02" is missed and becomes a "miss"; when there is a 3-bet state between 2BB flags; when there is a 2-bet state between 3BB flags; when there is a "miss" when a "push order minor role" is missed and becomes a "miss". In order to change the combination of symbols displayed as a "miss" in some or all of these cases, these different combinations of symbols are specified in advance in a symbol combination table, and these are allowed to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the determined internal winning role, so that the combination of symbols related to the "miss" displayed can be changed depending on the situation, etc.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit processing in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, each limit processing of normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing (number of games), and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and limit processing other than each of these limit processings can be executed, or some of these limit processings can be prevented from being executed.

Normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaches 1500 or more (i.e., when 1500 consecutive plays have been played during the advantageous zone). The advantageous zone game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the advantageous zone (including the presentation zone) begins, and ends and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The advantageous zone game number counter also counts when the number of bets is either 2 or 3 coins. The advantageous zone game number counter also counts in the 2BB and 3BB states.

When the normal limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), regardless of whether it is during the presentation period or the increase period (pseudo bonus), the advantageous period is forcibly ended and transitioned to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period (for example, information for controlling the presentation period or increase period, information related to the current mode, information related to the play period of the pseudo bonus, information related to the ceiling game number and whether the ceiling has been shortened, the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter, and various information obtained during the advantageous period and various information required to control the advantageous period) is also cleared (initialized).

Normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the favorable zone payout counter becomes "2401" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone exceeds 2400). The favorable zone payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, the "net increase (difference)") when the favorable zone (including the performance zone) starts, and ends the counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The favorable zone payout counter also counts when the number of bets is 2 or 3. The favorable zone payout counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. The favorable zone payout counter also subtracts a value that is appropriately counted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-2" or "-3") when a "miss" or "miss" occurs during the favorable zone. Therefore, in cases where the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the start of the favorable zone, the value may become negative (or it may be configured to always remain "0" when the value becomes negative). In other words, the favorable zone payout number counter is capable of counting from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone to the defined highest point (difference in number of medals: 2400 medals).

When the normal limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), regardless of whether the player is in the performance period or the increase period (pseudo bonus), the advantageous period is forcibly ended and the player transitions to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (i.e., when 1445 consecutive plays have been played during the favorable zone). The control game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the favorable zone (including the presentation zone) starts, and ends and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three coins, and does not count when the number of bets is two coins. The control game number counter counts when in a non-bonus state, and does not count when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state. However, the control game number counter can also be configured in the same way as the favorable zone game number counter.

When the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (i.e., during an increase period), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous period is forcibly ended accordingly and a transition is made to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the aforementioned advantageous period is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the player is not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., during the presentation period), the game will first forcibly transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if the pseudo bonus transition lottery is not won, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the pseudo bonus to which the player has transitioned ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information regarding the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Note here that the value of the advantageous zone game number counter where normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1445". Since the maximum number of games played (continuation period) during a pseudo bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit process (number of games) is executed when a predetermined restricted period of play has been played in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming too high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus starts or during it, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, which may reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit process (number of games) is executed in a game that is one possible continuation period (55 games) per increased zone before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, thereby preventing the pseudo bonus from ending prematurely and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per two increase sections (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. Also, for example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per one increase section (55 games) + grace period (2 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. Also, for example, in the case of a specification in which a premonition state is passed through before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this premonition state is "4 games," the special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuation possible period per one increase section (55 games) + maximum premonition period (4 games) before the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) can be any time before the timing at which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable period exceeds 2125). The control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference in number of medals)") from the start of the favorable period (including the performance period), and ends the counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable period ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The control payout number counter also counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. The control payout number counter also counts when in a non-bonus state, and does not count when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable zone, the control payout counter subtracts an appropriate count value according to the actual number of medals paid out (for example, "-3 medals"). However, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable zone (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out), the control payout counter counts the number of medals paid out as if no "miss" (or difference) occurred. Specifically, for example, in a game where you bet three coins and win "Push Order Bell A," if the stroke order is correct, the number of medals paid out (maximum) will be "8 medals" (the difference in number is "+5 medals"), but if the stroke order is not correct and the pressing position is correct, the number of medals paid out will be "1 medal" (the difference in number is "-2 medals"), and if the pressing position is not correct, a missed medal will occur and the number of medals paid out will be "0 medals" (the difference in number is "-3 medals"); however, the control payout counter will count the difference in number of medals as "+5 medals" in either case in that game.

In addition, for example, if the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter becomes greater than the value of the control payout number counter due to the activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter is corrected to the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. The control payout number counter can also be configured in the same way as the advantageous zone payout number counter.

When the special limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (i.e., during an increase period), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous period is forcibly ended accordingly and a transition is made to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the aforementioned advantageous period is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the player is not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., during the presentation period), the game will first forcibly transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if the pseudo bonus transition lottery is not won, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (payout number). Then, when the pseudo bonus to which the game has been transitioned ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information relating to the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Note that the value of the advantageous zone payout counter where normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed (activated) is "2401", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (payout amount) is executed (activated) is "2126". Since the maximum number of coins that can be won during a pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) in the first gaming machine is "275 coins" (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be awarded during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit process (payout number) is executed when a game value equivalent to a predetermined regulated game value amount is awarded in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the game from becoming too gambling-like. However, for example, if this normal limit process (payout number) is executed immediately after the start of a pseudo bonus or during it, the player may feel distrustful or lose interest in the game. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit process (payout number) is executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increased zone (275 coins) is awarded, thereby preventing the pseudo bonus from ending midway and causing the player to feel distrustful or lose a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (payout number) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per two increase sections (275 pieces x 2 sets = 550 pieces). Also, for example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per one increase section (275 pieces) + the amount of game value equivalent to the grace period (8 pieces). In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The semi-limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and the result is "ceiling shortening enabled", then "1" is added) multiplied by "55" (i.e., the period during which the pseudo bonus can continue), and the result of the addition is "1390" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is "1" and the result is "ceiling shortening enabled", then the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the semi-limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) when the value of the control game number counter is "1280".

The semi-limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and the ceiling shortening lottery is set to "ceiling shortening enabled", then "1" is added) multiplied by "275" (i.e., the amount of game value that can be awarded with the pseudo bonus), and the result of the addition is "1851" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is "1" and the ceiling shortening is enabled, then the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the semi-limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) when the value of the control payout number counter is "1301". Note that since the semi-limit process (number of games) and the semi-limit process (payout number) both perform the same restriction, once the operating condition of one is met and activated, there is no need to operate it redundantly even if the operating condition of the other is met.

When the semi-limit process (number of games) or the preparation limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are not executed during the pseudo bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous zones. In other words, the extension of the play period in the increase zone is suppressed. Note that the method of suppressing the extension of the play period in the increase zone is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of 1G consecutive may be made lower than normal, and in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of ceiling shortening may be made lower than normal. In other words, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery themselves are executed, but it may be made difficult to win these lotteries. Also, for example, in the performance zone after the execution of the semi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that will be a winning lottery in the pseudo bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to transition to the pseudo bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value that determines a mode transition that is advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered, making it more difficult for the pseudo bonus to be consecutive.

In addition, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or semi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), in the series of subsequent advantageous periods, during the presentation period, special processing is performed when a "fixed role" (see FIG. 7(a)) is drawn. Below, this special processing is explained using the example of the case where the "fixed role" is "F_fixed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "fixed cherry").

When neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "Definite Cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (or during the increase period), a "Winning Lottery (Next Play)" is determined in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (see FIG. 7(c)). In addition, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that players have high expectations for, so in a game in which information on the stop operation is not notified, the general procedure is for the player to perform a stop operation at the first left stop and while aiming for the "cherry" symbol (aiming for the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when playing according to the general procedure, when a "Definite Cherry" is drawn, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped on the lower row of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "fixed cherry" is drawn, a notification may be made to the effect that the first left stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2") should be made. In addition, a "winning lottery (next game)" is not limited to a lottery in which the pseudo bonus starts from the next game, and may be a lottery in which the pseudo bonus starts from the next game or later.

Here, a skilled player will perform a stopping operation, for example, aiming for the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, in order to further determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "definite cherry". As a result, the "BAR" symbols will line up in the middle of each reel, and the player will be able to recognize that they have won a "definite cherry" (see, for example, "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, a player without skill may not perform a stopping operation aiming for the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, or may be unable to perform such an operation, and may not be able to determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "definite cherry" from the stop display mode (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is operating, if a "determined cherry" is won and the symbol combination of a "determined cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if a "determined cherry" is won and the symbol combination of a "determined cherry replay" is not displayed, but the symbol combination of a "cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100% or with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is in operation, you will be notified that a pseudo bonus will begin when the next game starts with a "Red 7s lined up" effect, and the pseudo bonus will begin.

On the other hand, if a "confirmed cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (or during the increase period) after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery will initially determine "winning lottery (next game)" (see FIG. 7(c)), but this determination result will be rewritten to "winning lottery (current game)" by executing a special process. Then, at the start of the current game, a "red 7s line up" presentation will be performed to announce that a pseudo-bonus will begin, and the pseudo-bonus will begin.

At this time, in the current game, the symbol combination of "Determined Cherry Lip" (including the symbol combination of "Cherry Lip") is not displayed, and a notification (special notification) of information on the stop operation to display the symbol combination of "Middle Lip" is made. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is made to the effect that the first right stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the game flow is changed to "Determined Cherry Lip" display → pseudo bonus start from the next game, but after the activation of either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts), the game flow is changed to "middle lip" display by performing a stop operation according to the special notification from the current game. The special notification may be controlled by the main (main control board 71) side, or it may be controlled only by the sub (sub control board 72) side, from the viewpoint that the player will not suffer any disadvantage even if the result is a transition to a pseudo bonus.

In addition, if a "Definite Cherry" is won after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, and the symbol combination for the "Definite Cherry Rep" is displayed despite a special notification being issued, the special winning sound will not be output.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role, the procedure for the stop operation is not basically notified. For this reason, if the procedure for the stop operation is notified and the "middle replay" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, when such a state occurs, the player will clearly recognize that one of the semi-limit processes has been activated, which may result in a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous zone, regardless of whether or not one of the semi-limit processes is activated (or even after the activation of one of the semi-limit processes), if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning role, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the special notification is unnatural. Also, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Also, in this case, in the pseudo bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a "winning lottery (current game)" may be determined with a predetermined probability.

So far, we have used the example of monitoring the play period in the favorable zone using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" to activate the normal limit process, special limit process, and semi-limit process, but the conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the favorable zone game number counter, the value of the favorable zone payout counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout counter, as well as the value of the 1G consecutive counter and the presence or absence of ceiling shortening (i.e., variables for activating the semi-limit process), etc., when each limit process is executed, can be changed as appropriate depending on the game specifications, market trends, etc.

Furthermore, the method for monitoring the play period of the advantageous zone is not limited to the above. For example, if the "number of navigations" is used to monitor the play period of the advantageous zone, normal limit processing (number of navigations), special limit processing (number of navigations), or semi-limit processing (number of navigations) can be executed in the same manner as described above. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be adopted to monitor the play period of the advantageous zone, and by specifying the value at which normal limit processing is executed, the value at which special limit processing is executed, and the value at which semi-limit processing is executed for the adopted element, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) and the specific state (e.g., presentation zone) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in the series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in the series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter is "2401" or more), the series of advantageous zones are forcibly ended. However, when the play period in the series of advantageous zones becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in the series of advantageous zones becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), if the advantageous state exists, the series of advantageous zones are ended when transitioning to the specific state.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous periods is not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, but rather it is possible for a series of advantageous periods to end within a certain period in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessively high levels of gambling, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (e.g., pseudo bonus) and the specific state (e.g., presentation zone) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in this series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in this series of advantageous zones becomes a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is "2401" or more), this series of advantageous zones is forcibly ended, but when the play period in this series of advantageous zones becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in this series of advantageous zones becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is "2126" or more), if the advantageous state is not in an advantageous state, it is transitioned to an advantageous state, and when the transitioned advantageous state ends and transitions to a specific state, the series of advantageous zones is terminated.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous zones are not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, and it is possible to end a series of advantageous zones within a certain period of time in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. Furthermore, when ending a series of advantageous zones in this way, if the state is not advantageous, the system transitions to an advantageous state before ending the series. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessive gambling, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set taking into consideration the period during which the advantageous state can continue (e.g., "55 games") or the amount of gaming value that can be awarded (e.g., "275 coins"), so that it is possible to prevent the amount of gaming value awarded to the player from being excessively restricted while still taking into consideration the feelings of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but when the play period in a series of advantageous zones is shorter than the specific period and becomes a special period set according to the number of granted rights (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the semi-limit process (number of games) is executed), or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous zones is less than the specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of granted rights (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes a value at which the semi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the series of subsequent advantageous zones. This prevents, for example, a player from being granted more rights than he or she can consume, which would result in the series of advantageous zones being forcibly ended in such a state, causing the player to feel distrustful or have a sense of loss, and thus makes it possible to suppress excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," even if a difference occurs between the amount of game value that should have been awarded and the amount of game value that has actually been awarded due to, for example, a player's operating error or ignoring of instructions, this difference is not taken into consideration, and the calculation is performed based on the amount of game value that should have been awarded. This makes it possible to prevent a series of advantageous zones from being unnecessarily extended due to such player actions, and to prevent unfairness from occurring between players who have performed such actions and players who have not, making it possible to take into consideration the feelings of the player while preventing excessive speculation.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a fixed combination (e.g., "fixed cherry") that confirms a transition to an advantageous state is won in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed (e.g., a state after the semi-limit processing has been activated), a special notification is made to prevent the display of a special pattern combination (e.g., "fixed cherry replay") that clearly indicates the winning of this fixed combination. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that started the advantageous state in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings. Note that any performance execution means may be used to make the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is made, the advantageous state that would have started from the next game is started from the current game. This allows the player to perform the stopping operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, so that even when such a special notification is made, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed, if a fixed combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is possible to issue a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound), but when the granting of rights is suppressed, if a fixed combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed, it is not possible to issue a special notification. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that started the advantageous state when the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's feelings. Note that any performance execution means may be used to issue the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the decision as to whether or not to issue a special notification is made depending on whether or not a fixed combination has been drawn, whether or not a special symbol combination has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been issued. This allows for more appropriate management of the circumstances under which a special notification is issued.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous zone game number counter and advantageous zone payout number counter count regardless of the amount of gaming value bet, making it possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) not only in the three-coin bet state but also in the two-coin bet state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the three-coin bet state, but do not perform counting in the two-coin bet state. Therefore, in the three-coin bet state, it is possible for the special limit process (number of games) and special limit process (number of payouts) to be executed, but in the two-coin bet state, it is not possible for the special limit process (number of games) and special limit process (number of payouts) to be executed. Therefore, in the two-coin bet state, the execution of the normal limit process (number of games) or normal limit process (number of payouts) may forcibly end a series of advantageous periods even during a pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, for example, the probability of winning the minor prize and the number of medals paid out differ between the three-coin bet state and the two-coin bet state (see Figures 10 to 15), so playing in the two-coin bet state is more disadvantageous to the player than playing in the three-coin bet state. However, the method of making playing in the two-coin bet state more disadvantageous to the player is not limited to this. For example, if playing in the two-coin bet state during a pseudo bonus is played, the stopping operation procedure may be notified, so that the player is at a disadvantage.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a first amount (e.g., "3 coins") of gaming value is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods are not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, and it is possible to end a series of advantageous periods within a certain period in a natural flow accompanying the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss while suppressing excessively high gambling tendency, and therefore makes it possible to take into consideration the emotions of the player. On the other hand, when a second amount (e.g., "2 coins") of gaming value is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods may be forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, which makes it possible to make the player realize that he/she has not played in the intended playing method, and therefore encourages the player to play in the intended playing method.

In addition, since in a series of advantageous zones, when the second amount of game value is bet and play is performed, it is more disadvantageous for the player than when the first amount of game value is bet and play is performed, by making it possible to issue such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a more advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to playing in a way that the player did not intend.

[5-5. Storage Area Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the configuration of the storage areas of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figs. 17 to 22. Fig. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an activation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Fig. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a push order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning lottery flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and pattern code storage area)
First, the configurations of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 17. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the above storage areas is composed of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by 1 byte of data. Note that the data stored in each storage area is only the 1 byte of data in the "Data" column in Figure 17, but for ease of explanation, Figure 17 also shows the "combination" (in Figure 17, the symbols on reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R are listed in that order) indicating the symbol combination associated with the bit of each storage area, and its contents (see Figures 11 to 14).

The data stored in the winning flag storage area is used to enable the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that corresponds to the internal winning role (i.e., the type of symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in the current game). For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if it is carried over), then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed role (i.e., the type of symbol combination displayed on the winning line in the current game). For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB is displayed on the winning line in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that can still be displayed on an active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is spinning. For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB can still be displayed on an active line while at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

(Carryover role storage area)
Next, the configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 18. The carryover combination storage area is configured with a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

When the internal lottery process determines that the bonus role of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is the internal winning role, these bonus roles are stored in the carryover role storage area as carryover roles ("1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover roles stored in the carryover role storage area are not cleared and are retained until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. Also, while the carryover role is stored in the carryover role storage area, the carryover role (bonus role) is stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winning role (minor role/replay role) determined by the internal lottery process.

(Game Status Flag Storage Area)
Next, the configuration of the game status flag storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 19. The game status flag storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, when the current game status is 2BB, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

In the first gaming machine, since the RT state is not provided, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 does not have an area indicating the type of RT state. However, for example, when the RT state is provided, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) in the advantageous zone is stored in a mode flag storage area described later, but it can also be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming zones of the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone. It can be managed by providing an advantageous zone flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and the ART state. It can be managed by providing an AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown), or it can be managed by storing in this gaming state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each of which is represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is start mode, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Also, if the current mode is heaven A mode, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the activated stop button storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 21. The activated stop button storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 of the activated stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of stopped reel), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated (type of reel that is spinning).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button that has been pressed this time, i.e., the activated stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, i.e., a valid stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button that has been pressed this time and a stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the activated stop button storage area.

(Pressing order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 22. The pressing order storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1-byte data. Note that the pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, i.e., the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all reels are spinning, a "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing sequence storage area. Next, when stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), a "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but a "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. Next, when stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "center" second stop), a "1" remains stored in bit 0, but a "0" is stored in bit 1. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing sequence for the current game based on the data stored in the pressing sequence storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described with reference to Figures 23 to 32. Note that in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the process contents may be described using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the process contents of the various processes shown below are not limited to this.

[6-1. Main Processing]
First, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. Fig. 23 also shows the power-on processing executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachislot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). In this processing, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this process, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased for each unit game, such as a winning flag storage area or a winning activation flag storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance/start check process (S3). In this process, for example, the input state of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, etc. is checked, and various processes required at the start of the game are performed. Details of the medal acceptance/start check process will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, a random number value for an internal lottery (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535) and a random number value for effects (random number value for other lotteries) used in various lotteries related to gameplay (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535 or a range of 0 to 255) are extracted, and the various extracted random number values are stored in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the acquisition manner of the various random number values is not limited to the above. The required number of random number values can be appropriately acquired from each predetermined number range (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, a range of 0 to 127, etc.).

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary to determine the internal lottery combination are performed based on the internal lottery table and the internal lottery random number value according to the current game state, etc. The internal lottery process will be described in detail later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this process, when starting a game, if a transition condition for each game state is met (for example, based on a determined internal lottery combination, etc.), various processes are performed to transition the game state according to the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the game period of the current game state. Details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, data of the start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in a communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32) described below. The methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are also basically the same.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main side presentation control processing at the start of play (S8). In this processing, when various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the start of play, various processes necessary for performing the presentation are performed. For example, if a lock presentation is to be performed at the start of play, the execution of the lock presentation is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification of the pseudo game) is controlled. Also, for example, if the AT state is present and information on a stop operation is to be notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Also, although details are omitted, if a lock presentation is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S9). In this processing, various information required for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of attraction priority table to be used in the current game, is set based on the internal winning combination and game status, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel spin start processing (S10). In this processing, it requests that all reels start spinning. Then, when it is requested that all reels start spinning, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control processing described below (see S203 in FIG. 32), and each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts spinning. Each reel that has started spinning is accelerated until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Also, although details are omitted, in this processing, a reel spin start command generation and storage processing is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order storage process (S11). In this process, data indicating the pull-in priority order is obtained for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel (all reels in this case) by referencing the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority order table, and stored in a pull-in priority order data storage area (not shown). Note that, although not shown, a symbol code storage process, which will be described later, is performed prior to this process.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, various processes necessary to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel are performed based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop control sets set accordingly) and the stop operation state of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. The reel stop control process will be described in detail later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a winning activation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether there is a bit in which a "1" is stored in the winning activation flag storage area. In addition, although details are omitted, this process also involves the winning activation command generation and storage process.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout/replay activation process (S14). In this process, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination process is a symbol combination related to a minor role, the corresponding number of medals is paid out, and if the symbol combination is a symbol combination related to a replay role, various processes necessary to activate a replay in the next game are performed. Note that, for example, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination process is a symbol combination related to a replay role, a process is performed to set a value equal to the number of bets in the current game in the automatic medal counter described below. In addition, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs end-of-game state control processing (S15). In this processing, when the game ends, for various game states, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), various processes are performed to transition the game state according to the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Details of the end-of-game state control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main side presentation control processing at the end of game (S16). In this processing, when various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the end of game, various processes necessary for performing the presentation are performed. For example, if a lock presentation is to be performed at the end of game, the execution of the lock presentation is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notifications related to the pseudo game) is controlled. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a lock presentation is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this processing.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the machine can be configured to perform processes other than these as needed, and can also be configured not to perform some of these processes. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Power-on processing)
Next, the power-on process carried out in S1 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the power-on process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on initialization process (not shown), then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not writing to the main RAM 103 was performed normally based on the results of the test (S21). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

When the main CPU 101 determines that writing to the main RAM 103 was successful (YES in S21), it determines whether the setting key switch 52 is on (S22). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when changing the setting (S23). In this processing, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased when changing the setting, such as a carryover role storage area, a game status flag storage area, or a mode flag storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S24). In this process, data for an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has started and to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation or setting value confirmation operation, and then a new setting value is set (stored) in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key switch 52 has been turned off (S26). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the new setting value has been set.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), it waits until the setting key switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it determines that the setting key switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S26), it performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S27). In this process, it generates initialization command data to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process has ended, and stores the generated data in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), it determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various pieces of information backed up when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off (power outage) are normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), it performs a game return process (S29). In this process, it performs a process to return the pachislot machine 1 to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), or if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), it performs power-on error processing (S30). Note that errors that occur as a result of this power-on error processing are not resolved by the reset operation described above, but are resolved when a new setting value is set. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power to the slot machine 1 once, and does not proceed to normal processing (S2 onward in FIG. 23) until a new setting value is set (until the processing of S22 to S26 described above is performed).

(Medal reception and start check processing)
Next, the medal acceptance/start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the medal acceptance/start check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether a replay role was won in the previous unit game (whether a replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), it performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this processing, the same number of medals as were inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Also, although details are omitted, if automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage processing is performed in this processing. Also, in this processing, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41) and after processing in S42, it performs auxiliary medal storage switch check processing (S43). In this processing, it determines whether the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state (i.e., whether a certain number of medals or more are stored in the auxiliary medal storage 33), and if it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state, it generates an auxiliary medal storage error. In this case, the processing is put on hold until the error is resolved. Furthermore, if it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this processing is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits are checked, and it is also determined whether the acceptance of medals is prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medals can be accepted, the state becomes one in which medals can be accepted (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) (acceptance of medals is permitted). Note that if a selector error has occurred, the process is put on hold until the error is resolved.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the machine is ready to accept medals (S45). If the main CPU 101 determines that the machine is ready to accept medals (YES in S45), it performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the detection results of the bet switch 6S. Also, although details are omitted, if a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is possible to insert medals or to give credits (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". If the main CPU 101 judges that it is not possible to insert medals or to give credits (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (NO in S49), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the state as one in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which betting operations are not acceptable).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the game is not ready to accept medals (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that the game is ready to accept medals or credits (YES in S47), or after processing S48, it determines whether the number of medals inserted is the number that allows play to begin (S49). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of inserted coins is the number required to start playing (YES in S49), it determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the player has performed a start operation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 then ends the medal acceptance/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of inserted coins is not enough to start playing (NO in S49), and if the main CPU 101 determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (NO in S50), the process returns to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Note that Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check the setting value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the setting value, the number of bets, the game status, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for the internal lottery from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for the internal lottery acquired in S4 of the main process described above. Note that in this process, if it is determined that the setting value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred and executes the above-mentioned power-on error process (see S30 in FIG. 24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (e.g., updated by addition) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination defined in the set internal lottery table, and it is determined whether the updated result is a predetermined result (e.g., whether it has overflowed). If it is a predetermined result, that internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for this unit game. Note that if the predetermined result is not obtained even after determining all internal winning combinations, the result of this unit game will be a "lose" ("lose" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). If the main CPU 101 judges that an internal winning combination has not been determined (NO in S65), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be judged (sequentially updates the random number values for the internal lottery) and repeats the process of S64 until judgments have been made for all internal winning combinations (or until an internal winning combination is determined halfway through).

When the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning role has been determined (YES in S65), it determines whether the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a minor role or a replay role, rather than a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (YES in S66), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role in the winning flag storage area.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning role is not a role that is not eligible for carryover (NO in S66), and after processing in S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning role is eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role eligible for carryover (YES in S68), it determines whether the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus roles have not yet been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S69), it updates the carryover role storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carryover role storage area is updated based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the carryover role storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning role is not a role eligible for carryover (NO in S68), if it determines in S69 that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (NO in S69), or after processing S70, it again determines whether the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (S71 is NO), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover role storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when a bonus role is carried over (or a winning role has been won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the winning flag storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the bonus role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing of S72, it performs a sub-flag setting process (S73). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag or an advantageous zone winning time sub-flag is set based on the internal winning role. Note that in this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to information on the stop operation notified by the instruction monitor may be set. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control process)
Next, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when starting a game, a check is made as to whether or not a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another game state is satisfied. For example, in the case of transitioning to a flag interval as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus role, this process checks whether or not the predetermined bonus role has been won. In the case of the first gaming machine, the flag interval is not configured as an RT state (i.e., as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so this check is not necessary. Also, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific transition condition is satisfied and a specific number of games are played, this specific number of games can also be managed in this process.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set game state (S84). In this process, when it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or to set a lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the game state, such setting process is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has not been met (NO in S82), and after processing S84, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S85), it performs a favorable zone start condition establishment check process (S86). In this process, when starting play, it checks whether the transition condition for transitioning from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (favorable zone start condition) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process, for example, involves conducting the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery, and checking whether the lottery result will start the favorable zone.

Then, the main CPU 101 judges whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S87). If the main CPU 101 judges that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S87), it ends the game start state control process. If the main CPU 101 judges that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S87), it performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous zone (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous zone. In this process, in response to the start of the advantageous zone, it appropriately performs setting processing such as starting counting various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes (that is, starting monitoring the game period of a series of advantageous zones).

Then, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started favorable zone. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, the destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the set mode or to set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, according to the set destination mode, when the mode is shifted to the pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the play period, when the mode is shifted to the end mode, "32 games" is set as the play period, and when the mode is shifted to the other mode, the corresponding ceiling number of games is set. In addition, the lottery value (lottery table) in various lotteries (see Figures 7 and 8, etc.) is set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current play zone is not a non-favorable zone (i.e., it is a favorable zone) (NO in S85), it performs processing at the start of play in the favorable zone (S91). Details of the processing at the start of play in the favorable zone will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a check process for determining whether the advantageous zone end condition is met (S92). In this process, when starting play, a check is made to see whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the end condition of the advantageous zone) is met. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the operation conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of games in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (S93). When the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (YES in S93), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous zone (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous zone and sets the non-advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous zone, it performs initialization processing to clear all information (that is, information about the advantageous zone) related to, for example, various counters related to various limit processing (see FIG. 16), the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone, and the game period of the mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control processing. Also, when the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has not been met (NO in S93), it ends the game start state control processing.

(Processing at the start of play during advantageous period)
Next, the game start processing during the advantageous period performed in S91 of the game start state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the start of play) (S101). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of games played in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) in the advantageous zone, or various counters that manage other advantageous degrees are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtracting (adding) 1 per game, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S102). When the main CPU 101 judges that it is in a specific mode (YES in S102), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of play) (S103). In this processing, for example, when it is possible to extend the play period of the AT state (for example, extending the number of games or adding the number of sets, etc.) at the start of play, it judges whether or not the execution condition of such an extension is established, and performs processing such as extending the play period based on this judgment result (if it is possible to shorten the play period of the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this processing, the play period of the AT state may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the play period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S101 described above, and only processing related to the extension may be performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, a 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and a process is performed to extend the pseudo bonus according to the lottery result.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the information of the stop operation notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be included in the start command are set. Note that in this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. In other words, when a role to be notified is won in the AT state, navigation may not necessarily occur, and in this process, whether or not navigation occurs may be determined according to a predetermined condition (for example, the type of role to be notified or a predetermined probability of navigation occurrence).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the game is not in a specific mode (NO in S102) and after S104, it determines whether or not the mode transition condition is met (S105). Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether or not the transition mode has been determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, for example.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is met (YES in S105), it updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process sets the transition mode determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S107). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the mode according to the set mode, or to set lottery values (lottery tables) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process is similar to the process of S90 described above, for example. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the start of play in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not met (NO in S105), it ends the process at the start of play in the advantageous zone.

The state control process at the start of play shown in FIG. 27 and the state control process at the end of play shown in FIG. 30, as well as the process at the start of play during the favorable zone shown in FIG. 28 and the process at the end of play during the favorable zone shown in FIG. 31, are basically almost the same processing configuration. This means that for processes that may be performed either when play starts or when play ends (for example, processes that refer to a determined internal lottery role, such as a game state or mode transition, but the processing result only needs to be reflected by the time the current game ends (or the time the next game starts)), they may be performed in either one of them, and do not mean that similar processes are performed in both cases in duplicate. Therefore, such processes may be performed either when play starts or when play ends.

In contrast, processing that needs to be performed when game play begins (such as the navigation setting processing described above) may be performed when game play begins, and processing that needs to be performed when game play ends (such as processing that references the combination of displayed symbols) may be performed when game play ends. Also, for example, processing that needs to be performed at a specified time after game play begins and before game play ends, or processing where it is better to perform processing (such as processing that references the stop operation mode of the first stop operation) may be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Note that Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of all reels has reached a predetermined constant speed (e.g., 80 rotations per minute) (i.e., whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), it waits until all reels rotate at the constant speed. On the other hand, if it determines that all reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), it allows each reel to stop (S112). In other words, the main CPU 101 enables each stop button. In addition, the activated stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the activated stop button storage area).

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the process waits until a valid stop button is operated. When automatic stop control is to be performed, this wait time is measured, and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (S113: YES), it updates the activated stop button storage area and the pressing sequence storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on reel 3L (when stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Also, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing sequence storage area are updated to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled based on the activated stop button (S115). In this process, for example, if stop button 8L is pressed, reel 3L is determined to be the reel to be controlled.

Then, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L was pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a process for determining the number of sliding pieces (S117). In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 refers to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table and the data in the above-mentioned pull-in priority data storage area, and determines the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (amount of movement of the symbols).

Then, the main CPU 101 stores the planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the pattern position data of the position where the pattern will finally stop based on the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the planned stop position.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation and storage process (S119). In this process, data for the reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can be configured to include parameters that can specify not only the intended stop position, but also the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pattern code storage process (S120). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the pattern code storage area while also referring to the type of pattern (pattern code) at the intended stopping position of the reel for which the intended stopping position has already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an active stop button (S121). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a reel that is still spinning (whether or not a stopping operation has been performed on all reels).

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button is present (YES in S121), it performs a control change process (S122). In this process, if it is necessary to change the stop table or the pull priority table set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process, for example, depending on the stop operation mode performed by the player up to this point, the various information required for such stop control is reset.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority order storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel, the main CPU 101 acquires data indicating the pull-in priority order by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority order table while also referring to the type of symbol at the intended stop position on the reel whose intended stop position has already been determined, and stores the data in the pull-in priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), it ends the reel stop control process.

(Game End State Control Processing)
Next, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game end state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, a check is made as to whether a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another game state has been satisfied. For example, when a transition to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state is made based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, this process checks whether the predetermined symbol combination has been displayed. Also, when in a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, this process checks whether the termination conditions for these game states have been satisfied. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks whether, for example, a symbol combination related to 2BB or 3BB has been displayed. Also, when in a 2BB state or a 3BB state, for example, a check is made as to whether the termination conditions for these game states have been satisfied by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has been met (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area, and the 2BB state or 3BB state is set. Also, for example, when the game state is in the 2BB state or 3BB state, if the end condition for these game states is met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, when it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state or to set lottery values (lottery tables) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the gaming state, such setting processes are appropriately performed. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "1", and if the 3BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "176".

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any of the game states has not been met (NO in S132), and after processing S134, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S135), it performs a favorable zone start condition establishment check process (S136). As described above, in a non-favorable zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S86 described above (game start state control process).

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S137), it ends the state control process at the end of the game. Also, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S137), it performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous zone (S138). As described above, in the non-advantageous zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S88 described above (state control process at the start of the game).

Then, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous period that has started. As described above, in the non-advantageous period, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S89 described above (game start state control processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S140). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) for the set mode or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processes are performed as appropriate. As described above, in the non-advantageous zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S90 described above (state control process at the start of play).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current play period is not a non-favorable period (i.e., it is a favorable period) (NO in S135), it performs processing at the end of play during the favorable period (S141). Details of the processing at the end of play during the favorable period will be described later.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a check process for determining whether the advantageous zone end condition has been met (S142). In this process, when the game ends, a check is made as to whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the end condition of the advantageous zone) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the operating conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the payout number during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (S143). When the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has been met (YES in S143), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous zone (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous zone and sets the non-advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous zone, for example, it performs initialization processing to clear all information (i.e., information about the advantageous zone) related to various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone, and the game period of the mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control processing. Also, when the main CPU 101 judges that the end condition of the advantageous zone has not been met (NO in S143), it ends the game end state control processing.

(Processing at the end of play during advantageous period)
Next, the game end processing during the advantageous period performed in S141 of the game end state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game end processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the end of play) (S151). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the payout number during the favorable zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) during the favorable zone, or various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the payout number, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S152). When the main CPU 101 judges that the specific mode is in progress (YES in S152), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of play) (S153). In this processing, for example, when the play ends and the play period of the AT state can be extended (for example, by extending the number of games or adding the number of sets), it judges whether or not the conditions for such an extension are met, and performs processing such as extending the play period based on the judgment result (if the play period of the AT state can be shortened, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this processing, the play period of the AT state may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the play period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S151 described above, and only processing related to the extension may be performed in this processing. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered, and processing for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S152) and after S153, it determines whether the mode transition condition is met (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether the transition mode has been determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is met (YES in S154), it updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, this process sets the transition mode determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S156). In this process, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) of the mode according to the set mode, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting process is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process is similar to the process of S140 described above, for example. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the end of play during the advantageous period. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S154), it ends the process at the end of play during the advantageous period.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, the periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the number of interrupts actually executed for some or all of the processing may be set to "2" or more, resulting in the periodic interrupt processing being executed at a different cycle.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input states (on or off) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether there has been a change in the input state. If there has been a change in the input state, the change is stored in input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and input states that have not changed are stored as they are in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S203). In this process, it controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, and controls the rotation and stopping of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S204). In this process, it transmits each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In this embodiment, the various command data is temporarily stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in periodic interrupt processing; however, for example, the various command data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 without being stored in the communication data storage area. Also, although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the various command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by serial communication; however, for example, the various command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by parallel communication.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S205). In this process, it controls the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14, etc., connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S206). In this process, it updates various timers managed by the main control circuit 100.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S207). In this process, it detects whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open/close check process (S208). In this process, for example, the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. If various error states have occurred and if the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is open (off), a security signal is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs a register restoration process (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by the Sub-Control Circuit]
Next, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the overview of the sub-side control processing.

In addition, in the Pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications, but not so many restrictions are placed on the sub-control circuit 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can use various configurations depending on the type and number of connected presentation devices, the type of presentation performed by the presentation devices, etc., and the manufacturing costs, etc. This is why it is written "Overview" in Figure 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 201 performs power-on processing (S301 and S302) in the same manner as the main CPU 101. During this processing, processing is performed such as detecting whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializing data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and starting various tasks required for performing various performance execution control processing described below.

When the sub-CPU 201 receives a command sent from the main control circuit 100, it performs a performance execution control process when the command is received (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if the settings have been changed, the appropriate initialization process is performed on the sub side, and if the settings have not been changed, the process of restoring the sub side to the state before the power outage is performed.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referenced, and if the state is not AT, the content of the presentation that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination or game state, etc. is determined (by lottery if necessary), and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation of the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if the state is AT, in addition to this, the content of the presentation that notifies the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation of the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, the parameter information of the received lock command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.For example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the stop start position or the planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.For example, when a winning activation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning activation command is referenced, and if a bonus is awarded, the content of the effect linked to the bonus to be awarded is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

The sub-CPU 201 also performs processing for controlling the execution of effects when effect buttons 10a, 10b connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74) are operated (S305 and S306). In this processing, for example, when an effect button in accordance with an effect is operated while an operation-linked effect is being executed, the sub-CPU 201 controls various effect devices so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Also, for example, when an effect button is operated to call up a user menu (described below) while not playing, the sub-CPU 201 performs control to display the user menu. Also, when an effect button is operated to perform a selection or decision operation while the user menu is being displayed, the sub-CPU 201 performs control in accordance with these operations.

In addition, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger occurs, the sub-CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this processing, for example, when a non-operation period during which no operation related to the game or user menu is performed reaches a predetermined period (e.g., about 30 seconds), the sub-CPU 201 determines the content of the effect related to the demo state notification and controls various effect devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

[8. Other functions of Pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has various functions for controlling the game and the presentation, as well as various configurations for implementing these functions, but it can also have other functions, such as those shown below. In the following, an example of other functions on the player's side and an example of other functions on the gaming facility's side will be described.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, a user menu is displayed by the player's presentation operation, a desired menu is selected from the user menu, and then the player performs an appropriate selection and decision operation for the selected menu, enabling the player to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when the "arrangement and payout table" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the performance display section, which allows the player to check the pattern arrangement on the pachislot machine 1, the specified pattern combination, and the payout (contents of the bonus) when the combination is won.

For example, when "Volume/Light Adjustment" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display unit, which allows the brightness of the various display devices in the slot machine 1, the volume of the sound output from the speakers, or the light intensity of the lamps and LEDs to be set. During such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts settings-related operations (i.e., the operation unit that accepts performance operations).

For example, when "Custom" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display unit that allows the setting of the performance mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used in the performance (including the type of the character (display mode) itself, the type of voice corresponding to the character, or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character, etc.), the probability of the performance occurring (including the type of expectation when the performance occurs, etc.), or the mode of suggestion or notification (including the timing of performance execution, etc.)). Note that when setting in this manner, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept operations related to the settings, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts performance operations).

For example, when "UniMemo" is selected and confirmed, it becomes possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile terminal (e.g., a mobile phone, smartphone, etc.). With such an information provision service, for example, the player can log in to start playing (play can also be started without logging in), and by logging out when the game is over, the player can confirm or obtain game history information (e.g., information according to various game results, such as the total number of games played, the number of times an advantageous game state occurred, and the maximum number of coins won).

In addition, for example, the game history information also includes information regarding associated benefits, such as information indicating the type of character that can be displayed during play and the type of music that can be output depending on the game result (achievement of the unlocking conditions), and information indicating the type of character that can be displayed on the player's mobile terminal and the type of music that can be output.

Note that various methods can be used for logging in and out of such information provision services. For example, the player may use his/her terminal to read a two-dimensional code displayed on the display screen to log in and out, or the player may enter a password or memorize a password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a four- to ten-digit character string may be displayed as a password to be entered next time, which the player may obtain by writing it down on paper or taking a photo of it on a mobile device, and the password obtained in this way may be entered when logging in before the start of the next game). These methods can also be combined as appropriate to log in and out.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (which may be a setting change operation or other operation by the amusement facility's administrator) by the amusement facility's administrator, a desired menu is selected from the hall menu, and then an appropriate selection/determination operation is performed for the selected menu, allowing the amusement facility's administrator to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "Time Setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen that allows the date and time, etc. of the slot machine 1 to be set is displayed in the performance display section. The date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, during the sub-side power-on process described above (see S302 in FIG. 33).

For example, when "Total Medal Information" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the performance display section, which allows the user to check historical information showing the number of coins inserted and paid out during a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

For example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check history information showing the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a specified period (for example, each business day of seven business days) on the slot machine 1. For example, when "error information history" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check history information showing the date and time of error occurrences and their contents within a specified period (for example, each business day of seven business days) on the slot machine 1.

For example, when "Monitoring History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to check historical information showing the door opening date and time within a specified period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the Pachislot machine 1, as well as that period. For example, when "Warning Settings" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to set the manner and frequency of various warning notifications on the Pachislot machine 1.

For example, when "power saving mode setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachislot machine 1. Such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu. Furthermore, when making such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation section that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation section that accepts effect operations).

For example, when the "limit setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the limit function in the slot machine 1. The limit function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is met, renders the machine unplayable until the manager of the gaming establishment cancels the condition (for example, a reset operation). The predetermined operating condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase zone, or an advantageous zone (including an operating zone)) ends. When the limit function is set to ON, the automatic settlement function described below may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

For example, when "automatic settlement setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which allows the user to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function of the pachislot machine 1. The automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (i.e., all credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is met. The predetermined operating condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, either the bonus state, the increase zone, or the advantageous zone (including the effect zone)) ends. When the automatic settlement function is set to ON, the above-mentioned limit function may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

When setting the limit function or automatic settlement function, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts presentation operations). However, in this case, since it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, it is also possible to use only a specific operation unit (e.g., a stop button) as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings.

[9. Extension Example]
Up to this point, the pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machines to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied are not limited to this. For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to gaming machines called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines", and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines that can play games (perform gaming control) according to the game actions (operations) of the player. In addition, the configurations and functions of gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and extensions are possible. Below, such an extension example will be described, although it is merely an example.

(Pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine has, for example, a game board with a game area in which game balls can roll and flow down, a glass door including protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, a performance display device provided in a specified area of the game area (which may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit including various control boards that perform various controls related to the game and performance, and these are supported by a frame body (which may be simply referred to as a "frame" or the like).

In addition, the front side of the pachinko machine is provided with, for example, a launch handle as one of the operation means for the player, an upper tray in which game balls to be used in the game can be stored, and a lower tray in which paid-out game balls can be stored. Many pachinko machines are also provided with the above-mentioned performance buttons and movable performance devices. In addition, the game area is provided with, for example, a starting area (sometimes called a "starting hole") or a specific area (sometimes called a "V winning hole") through which the game ball can pass, a variable winning device (sometimes called a "big winning hole") that can shift between a state in which it is easy for the game ball to win and a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win, and a variable display device that can variably display identification information (sometimes called a "design" or the like, including "special designs" and "normal designs").

In a pachinko machine, a player operates a launch handle to launch a game ball into a game area to play. For example, when a launched game ball passes through a starting area, a variable display is started. At this time, whether or not to transition the game state (for example, whether or not to transition to a big win game state or a small win game state that is advantageous to the player) is determined based on a probability according to the current state (for example, whether or not the game state is in a certain probability game state with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area (that is, whether or not to transition the game state is determined by lottery (or judgment)). After that, when a stop condition for the variable display (for example, the set variable time has ended) is established, the variable display stops in a stop mode according to the above-mentioned determination result. At this time, if the above-mentioned determination result is one that transitions the game state (a win), the stop mode that is stopped also becomes a display result corresponding to the win, and the game state corresponding to the win is transitioned in response to the display result being displayed. On the other hand, if the above decision result is one that does not change the game state (miss), the display result for the stop mode also corresponds to a miss, and the game state does not change. For example, when the launched game ball passes through a specific area (specific areas are usually placed in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), it is decided to change the game state regardless of the variable display device.

In other words, in a pachislot machine 1, the game begins when the player bets the necessary medals and performs a start operation, whereas in a pachinko machine, the player fires the necessary game balls by operating a launch handle, and the game begins when the game ball passes through a starting area, for example. However, both machines are similar in that the game begins due to the player's gaming action. Pachislot machine 1 and pachinko machines are also similar in that the stop mode that is ultimately permitted to be displayed (in other words, the content of the bonus to be awarded) is determined when the start trigger is met.

Furthermore, the Pachislot machine 1 basically stops the variable display by the player's stop operation, whereas the Pachinko machine stops the variable display when the stop condition is met (without the player's stop operation), which is different, but they are similar in that they both stop the variable display according to a pre-determined result and award a bonus according to the stopped state. The Pachislot machine 1 and the Pachinko machine are also similar in that they are capable of executing effects related to the game. For example, the effect display device functions as the above-mentioned effect display section or information display section. Furthermore, it goes without saying that the Pachinko machine may also be provided with effect execution means such as the above-mentioned lamps, speakers, or other effect devices, and effects may be executed by these.

In many pachinko machines, the decorative symbols (which are sometimes also referred to as "identification information") are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device. As mentioned above, the actual game results are displayed on the variable display device, but since the variable display device is small and the display results are shown as lighting patterns of multiple LEDs, it is often difficult for the player to recognize the game results. For this reason, the mainstream pachinko machines are designed to play by varying (and stopping) decorative symbols on the performance display device in conjunction with the variable display of the variable display device. And, the variable display of such decorative symbols (for presentation purposes, the variable display may start after a certain delay when the start trigger is established, or may temporarily stop before the stop condition is established) is basically the same as the variable table device described above, and displays the identification information variably or statically as the game progresses (for example, in the case of a win, the decorative symbols are displayed statically in a special stop mode (for example, matching symbols), while in the case of a loss, the decorative symbols are displayed statically in a non-special stop mode (for example, scattered symbols)). Therefore, it is possible to apply the invention according to this embodiment to this as one aspect of the variable display unit described above.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various items described as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 can be applied to the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of a pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that require medals and cannot be replaced by game balls, etc.).

In pachinko machines, various controls related to the game are performed by a main control circuit acting as a game control unit implemented on a main control board (including some payout-related controls that may be performed by a payout control circuit implemented on a payout control board electrically connected to the main control board), and various controls related to the presentation are performed by a sub-control circuit acting as a presentation control unit implemented on a sub-control board. Therefore, the various items described as the electrical configuration of pachinko machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of pachinko machines, except for those that have characteristics unique to pachinko machine 1 (for example, those related to the stop operation, etc.).

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 can provide game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration), such as a bonus state, an RT state, an AT state, and an ART state that combines these. For example, in the bonus state, the lottery mode for the small role is made more advantageous than the non-bonus state, making it possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time; in the RT state, the lottery mode for the replay role is made more advantageous than the non-RT state, making it possible to continue a state in which losses are less likely to occur (and, as a result, medals are less likely to decrease) for a certain period of time; and in the AT state, a favorable stop operation mode is notified, making it possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time.

In contrast, pachinko machines can also provide various game states with similar characteristics. For example, in a big win game state or a small win game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to transition to a state in which game balls are more likely to win, and thus making it possible to continue a state in which game balls are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a time-saving game state (sometimes called an "electric support state"), normal symbols are controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to create a state in which game balls are more likely to pass through the starting area, thereby increasing the frequency of lottery draws by the variable display device and making it possible to continue a state in which game balls are less likely to decrease for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a probability-variation game state, special symbols are controlled differently from the normal state, making it possible to continue a state in which the variable display device has a higher probability of winning (as a result, game balls are more likely to increase) for a certain period of time.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various matters described as the configuration of control related to the transition (or shift) of the game state as the playability of the Pachislot machine 1 can be applied as the configuration of control related to the transition (or shift) of the game state of a Pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the Pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that involve transitions between play zones, etc.). The same applies to the various other matters described as the playability of the Pachislot machine 1.

In addition, in pachinko machines, it is possible to switch to the time-saving game state when the number of plays in the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) reaches a specified number. In other words, pachinko machines can also be equipped with a ceiling function (a function that can switch to a favorable state (e.g., time-saving game state) as a relief from being stuck if an unfavorable state (e.g., normal game state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without switching to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot game state)). Therefore, the various matters described as the configuration related to the ceiling function of pachinko slot machine 1 can be applied as the configuration related to the ceiling function of pachinko machines.

In addition, in a pachinko machine, when the stop state of the variable display device during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) corresponds to a specific miss, this can trigger a transition to a time-saving game state. In other words, a transition (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot game state, etc.) is possible in a pachinko machine as well, due to the display of a specific display result (specific combination of symbols). Therefore, for example, the various matters described as configurations related to a transition (transition) to an RT state due to the display of a specific combination of symbols in a pachinko slot machine 1 can be applied as configurations related to a transition (transition) to a time-saving game state due to the display of a specific display result in a pachinko machine.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, play begins with the player performing a betting operation (i.e., inserting held medals into the medal insertion slot 5 to place a bet, or operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to bet credited medals) as one of the starting conditions, and if medals are to be paid out when the game ends, the hopper device 32 is driven to pay out medals from the medal payout outlet 11, or the medals are credited, as described above, but the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all forms in which a player bets the gaming value required for a game, plays the game based on that bet, and a bonus is awarded (e.g., gaming value is awarded) based on the results of the game. In other words, the invention can be applied not only to forms in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and medals are paid out by the player's actions, but also to those in which the gaming value held by the player is electromagnetically managed inside the pachislot machine 1 (or, even if not electromagnetically, at least managed in a manner in which the player cannot directly touch the gaming value), allowing for medal-free play. Here, such a pachislot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine." Note that medal-less gaming machines are sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines" or "enclosed gaming machines," etc.

The game value held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself, or by a game value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be described as a "medal count control board") that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). An example of the installation of this game value management device is described below.

The game value management device is a device equipped with at least a ROM and a RWM (or a RAM) and installed in the slot machine 1, and is connected to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be described as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication via a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device may be described as a "connection terminal board"). The game value management device performs necessary communication with the external game value providing device, and can perform a game value lending operation (i.e., an operation of providing game value required for a player to perform a betting operation of game value), a game value granting operation (i.e., an operation of providing the game value related to the grant to the player when a winning combination related to the grant of game value (the combination is established) is won), and an operation of electromagnetically recording the game value provided by these operations. The game value providing device is sometimes called a "game value (game medium) handling device," "game value (game medium) lending device," or "sand."

The external gaming value providing device is also connected to an external ball dispensing management device (ball dispensing management server), and the gaming value management device is configured to be able to transmit ball dispensing management information to the external ball dispensing management device via a communication device and the external gaming value providing device. Here, the ball dispensing management information is composed of various pieces of information necessary to enable the external ball dispensing management device to manage dispensing balls. An example of ball dispensing management information will be described later. The external gaming value providing device and the external ball dispensing management device are connected, for example, by an internet line.

Here, "balls paid out" directly means the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, the concept also includes the degree of benefit given to the player, such as the difference (net increase) between the number of paid out and the number of bets (for example, how much the player made a profit (how much the gaming establishment made a loss) or how much the player made a loss (how much the gaming establishment made a profit), the continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, or a series of advantageous periods, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination of these, etc.

For example, a retained game value number display device (not shown) that displays the number of retained game values may be provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 1, and the game value management device may manage the number of game values displayed on this retained game value number display device based on the management results of the number of game values. In other words, the game value management device may not only record the total number of game values that a player can use for playing by electromagnetic means, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recorded results. In this case, it is preferable that the game value management device has the ability to allow a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game values to an external game value providing device, and also has the ability to prevent the number of recorded game values from being reduced except when the player directly operates it, and also has the ability to transmit the signal indicating the number of recorded game values only via a communication device.

The gaming value management device may have not only a function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of the player using an external gaming value providing device, but also a function of managing the number of gaming values bet by the physical action of the player and the number of gaming values paid out by the physical action of the pachinko slot machine 1. In other words, it may be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of medals in a conventional pachinko slot machine 1. In this way, the pachinko slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method, or by a method such as the medal-less gaming machine described above, so that the pachinko slot machine 1 can have a common configuration regardless of the specification. In this case, the gaming value management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and hopper device 32 described above, or a method of indirectly controlling them by controlling them by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) and transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachislot machine 1 may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operation means and a return (settlement) operation means that can be operated by the player. The gaming value providing device may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operation means and a return operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to various devices such as an insertion slot for valuables such as paper money, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal (all not shown). Note that insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued on the day at a gaming establishment, but also member recording media held by members of the gaming establishment. The gaming value recorded on a non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (it becomes invalid from the next day onwards), but the gaming value recorded on a member recording medium is valid from the next day onwards.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be described below. For example, first, the player deposits a valuable amount into the game value providing device by any method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined amount of valuable amount in response to the player's operation on any of the lending operation means, and provides the game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable amount to the pachislot machine 1. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game value is required. Thereafter, when the player has acquired a predetermined amount of game value as a result of the game and wishes to end the game, the player operates any of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's operation on any of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects a recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. The game value management device clears the number of game values stored in itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange office or the like to exchange it for a prize, or can move to another pachislot machine 1 and continue playing by inserting the ejected recording medium into a game value providing device corresponding to the other pachislot machine 1. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member recording medium, it will remain valid from the next day onwards, so the player can stop playing here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation, but it may be configured to transmit only the number of game values desired by the player depending on the manner of the player's return operation. In other words, it may be possible to divide the game value held by the player. Also, the game value providing device records the transmitted number of game values on a recording medium and discharges it, but it may transmit information of a similar value to the player's mobile terminal using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna, etc., and may also discharge, for example, cash or a cash equivalent, as long as it provides the player with something of equivalent value.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may be provided with a lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device may be controlled to a state (locked state) in which communication between them is disabled in response to an operation on this lock operation means. In this case, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may be configured to perform authentication processes such as setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication, and the locked state may be released if the result of the authentication process is normal.

The medal-less gaming machine described so far, compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, does not require some external structures such as the medal insertion port 5 and medal payout port 11, or some internal structures such as the selector 31 and hopper device 32, so not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but the power consumption of the gaming machine can also be reduced. Also, since it is more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent acts against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment is improved and noise can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of medal-less gaming machine)
Next, a configuration example of the pachislot machine 1 configured as a medal-less gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medal-less gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal count control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal count control board is connected to the main control board 71, and manages the number of medals (game value number) owned by the player. The medal count control board is also connected to a communication-only unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). The medal count control board also transmits ball output management information to the ball output management device via the connection terminal board and the communication-only unit. The medal count control board is also equipped with a medal count control circuit (not shown). The medal count control circuit is also composed of, for example, a medal count control CPU (not shown), a medal count control ROM (not shown), and a medal count control RWM (not shown).

The ball output management device is, for example, a server for managing ball output managed by an association (information center) to which the gaming machine manufacturer belongs, and the transmitted ball output management information is stored in the ball output management device, which is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling characteristics of each gaming machine are appropriate (ball output performance).

From this perspective, the medal count control board and the connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, perform important functions in the slot machine 1, and therefore must be provided inside the slot machine 1 in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 show examples of such a manner.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in Fig. 34 shows that the medal count control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similar to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing processes to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize traces of opening (or the number of times it has been opened) (for example, sealing by crimping, affixing a sealing sticker, or affixing a crimping sticker that records that the crimp has been cut, etc.).

Therefore, by housing the medal count control board and the connection terminal board inside the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 34 shows that the medal count control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal count control board case provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the above-mentioned configuration example 1. Note that the medal count control board case is configured as a resin case that is transparent (or nearly transparent) like the main control board case, and the medal count control board and the connection terminal board housed therein are housed in a state where they can be easily seen.

Here, the medal count control board case of configuration example 2 can be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or can be configured to undergo at least a portion of the sealing process. For example, the medal count control board case can be configured to be sealed by crimping like the main control board case, but without a sealing sticker. Also, for example, the main control board case may be required to use a predetermined crimp sticker, but the medal count control board case may be configured to allow the use of any sticker as the crimp sticker.

<Example of accumulated data>
The example of stored data shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball management device. That is, it shows an example of ball management information that the medal count control board transmits to the ball management device via the connection terminal board and the communication unit. Note that this is only an example, and it is possible to configure the device so that some of the various information shown in FIG. 34 is not transmitted, or to transmit information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34.

The timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may also be arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball payout management device may also be arbitrary. As long as the ball payout management device is capable of monitoring the ball payout performance of each gaming machine at least for each unit (e.g., each business day of an amusement facility), the information may be transmitted at any timing. For example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball payout management device. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may differ depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of coins inserted" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values bet by the player's betting operation, excluding those bets made by the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "total number of paid out coins" is the cumulative number of paid out coins per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values granted by the payout process of the gaming machine, excluding those granted by the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference in number of coins that occurred during one unit after each gaming machine was powered on (in other words, the difference in number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most during one unit. This is referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal count control board calculates such a maximum difference in number of coins and transmits the calculated information to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes for business), and the communication-only unit transmits the information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The accumulated data "total number of coins paid out from game devices" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit since the power of each gaming machine was turned on, and is also the cumulative number of coins paid out while the various game devices are in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values awarded by the payout process of the gaming machine while the various game devices are in operation to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the various game devices are in operation), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the closing time of the gaming establishment).

The accumulated data "total number of consecutive feature payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on, and is also the cumulative number of payouts paid out while the consecutive feature (RB, including RB when BB is in operation) is in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game value awarded by the payout process of the gaming machine while the consecutive feature is in operation to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the consecutive feature is in operation), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the gaming establishment).

The medal count control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communication-only unit transmits the information to the ball management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). The accumulated data "role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role ratio information, the accumulated data "continuous role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned continuous role ratio information, the accumulated data "advantageous zone ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific zone ratio information, the accumulated data "instruction-included role ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role ratio information that is the subject of aggregation and calculation even during the AT state, and the accumulated data "role, etc. state ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific zone ratio information that is the subject of aggregation and calculation even during the operation of various roles.

The accumulated data "number of plays" is the cumulative number of plays per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of plays played to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of that information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming establishment closes for business).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also called "CPU ID", hereafter referred to as the "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball management device, it transmits information including the transmitted individual identification number.

The stored data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball output management device, it transmits information including the transmitted manufacturer code.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the communication-only unit, it transmits information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit transmits various information to the ball output management device, it transmits information including the transmitted product code.

The stored data "medal count control chip ID number" is the individual identification number of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball management device, it sends information including the individual identification number that was sent. Note that if there is no medal count control board and the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit, the information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball management device, it sends information including the manufacturer code that was sent. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is sent to the communication-only unit by the main control board 71, the information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the transmitted product code. Note that if there is no medal count control board and the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit, the information will be "0".

In this way, the ball dispensing management device is capable of storing various information (ball dispensing management information) transmitted from gaming machines. The ball dispensing management information also includes multiple individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal count control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball dispensing management device can identify the gaming machine that sent the information by these individual identification information, and if, for example, the correspondence between the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal count control chip ID number" changes from a certain point in time, it can recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (i.e., the possibility that fraud or unauthorized modification has occurred).

The ball output management information also includes multiple pieces of ball output information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of coins inserted" to "number of games played") that can identify the ball output performance per unit. Therefore, the ball output management device can use these pieces of ball output information to determine whether the gambling nature of the gaming machine that sent the information is within an appropriate range. For example, if the "total number of coins paid out" or the "ratio of instructed features" becomes significantly high from a certain point in time, it can determine the possibility that fraudulent activity or tampering has occurred, or that there was some kind of flaw in the original specification design.

If the ball output management device recognizes the above-mentioned possibility, it is expected that the result will be notified to the gaming facility or gaming machine manufacturer, etc., and appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, by constructing a management system that includes multiple managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication-only unit) that transmits ball output management information transmitted from the managed gaming machines to the ball output management device, and a ball output management device that manages the ball output performance of each managed gaming machine based on the transmitted ball output management information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to manage the number of game values owned by a player. Therefore, in order to allow the manager of the gaming facility to grasp such management status or other information, a medal count monitor device (not shown) may be provided on the medal count control board.

The medal count monitor device is, for example, configured with a four-digit seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal count control board case. The medal count monitor device sequentially displays various information (for example, part or all of the above-mentioned ball payout management information) related to the game value number tallied and calculated by the medal count control CPU (or it may be the main CPU 101). Note that if the display contents of the role ratio monitor device 54 are all displayed by the medal count monitor device, the role ratio monitor device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may be configured to be used in combination with the medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or on another board (e.g., a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. It may also be provided in another location within the cabinet G. For example, it may be provided on the medal count control board case. A management switch for starting the display on the medal count monitor device or for switching its contents may be provided within the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Assuming that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be configured to be used in combination with the medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may display the type of error state that has occurred when any of the various error states related to the device occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, if a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, if a communication error occurs with the gaming value providing device, or if an abnormality occurs in the medal count control RWM, a numerical value corresponding to the error may be displayed. In this case, an explanation section (such as a sticker or printing) indicating the correspondence may be provided on or near the medal count control board case so that the manager of the gaming facility can easily recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to transmit ball management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is also provided as a means for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured, for example, as follows.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. This not only reduces the number of parts, but also reduces the amount of wiring to the outside, thereby improving security.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged in close proximity at least inside the cabinet G. This can improve the efficiency of the connection process. Also, the length of the wiring can be kept constant, and the wiring locations can be limited, improving security.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit ball-discharge management information to the ball-discharge management device. The ball-discharge management device can appropriately manage the ball-discharge performance of each medalless gaming machine by the transmitted ball-discharge management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball-discharge performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, the device may not have a function of forcibly terminating the advantageous zone based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

In addition, the medal count control board may be provided with a function for appropriately managing the ball output performance, and on the assumption that the ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous zone based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

For example, the medal count control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the medal count control RWM described above or a different RWM). The ball output monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but is not initialized when the favorable zone ends, so as to monitor the ball output. When the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the favorable zone itself is not forcibly ended, but the control may be performed to reduce the ball output performance by lowering the probability of navigation occurrence, lowering the probability that the AT state is extended, or ending the AT state itself. In this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball output performance. In this case, such control results may be transmitted to the ball output management device as ball output management information. In other words, the ball output performance of each medal-less gaming machine may be managed in both the medal count control board and the ball output management device.

(Example of the main control board configuration of a pachinko slot machine)
Next, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. In the following, a configuration example of the reuse of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71 in the pachislot machine 1, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board control number must be printed on the main control board 71. The manufacturer's name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that produces the pachislot machine 1, and the control number is a number that identifies the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer name and the board management number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 as in the past. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, a slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are printed. After that, if model A is removed from the game store and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model B"), AA Co., Ltd. must erase the manufacturer name and board management number printed in the lower row by laser engraving and newly print the manufacturing number and board management number related to its own company in a different space (for example, the manufacturer name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board management number "AA-00-11-22" in the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35).

Then, if model B is subsequently removed from the gaming establishment, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. were to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"), BB Co., Ltd. would have to remove the manufacturer's name and board control number printed on the top line by laser engraving, and print a new manufacturing number and board control number related to their company in a different space. However, since there is no more free space in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, there is a problem in that, even though the hardware is still fully reusable, the main control board 71 may not be able to be reused due to the constraints mentioned above.

This is also true in cases where multiple manufacturer names and board control numbers have been printed on the machine from the beginning. For example, even if the serial numbers and board control numbers for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed on the machine in advance, the serial numbers and board control numbers for AA Co., Ltd. are erased by laser engraving when Model A is manufactured. Therefore, while BB Co., Ltd. may be able to reuse the machine, AA Co., Ltd. will not be able to reuse it. In contrast, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 are expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. In other words, the reusability of boards used to control games, such as the main control board 71, can be increased.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 35 shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and the board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in Fig. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of the code including the manufacturer's name and the board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) or other code can be used. In other words, the code may be any code as long as it includes information that allows a checker to uniquely identify the manufacturer's name and the board control number by some means (for example, a mobile terminal, etc.).

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, when model A is assumed to have been manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when model C is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can erase the third code from the right by laser engraving and print the fourth code from the right, so that the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of AA Co., Ltd., and thus it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even newer pachislot machine 1.

In other words, in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number, it is possible to save the printing space for each manufacturer's name and board control number on the surface of the main control board 71, making it possible to increase the reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Configuration Example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 shows that a code including a manufacturer name and a board management number is printed, similarly to configuration example 2 described above. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, multiple codes (for example, four) are printed from the beginning. For example, two codes are printed for each of AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. In addition, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the parts corresponding to each code are crimped with, for example, a strip-shaped member, etc., so that the codes can be fixed in an unreadable state. In addition, for example, by cutting the strip-shaped member, etc., the fixation can be released to make the codes readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, when model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is made readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right is made readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right is made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board management number of BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model C is removed from the gaming establishment and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can make only the fourth code from the right readable and the first through third codes from the right unreadable, thereby making it possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even new pachislot machine 1.

In addition, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, since it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, further reuse is possible, and it is also possible for the machine to be reused by a greater number of gaming machine manufacturers. Note that configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 can also be configured so that only crimping holes are provided, and the code is printed in the location corresponding to the crimping hole each time the machine is reused.

[10. Second gaming machine]
Next, referring to Figures 36 to 43, another specific example of the specifications regarding the playability of the slot machine 1 will be described as a "second gaming machine." In addition, in the description of each of Figures 36 to 40, the x-axis and y-axis shown in the figure will be used as appropriate. In addition, the embodiments described in Figures 1 to 35 are applied to all of the configurations of the slot machine 1 that are not described in each of Figures 36 to 40.

[10.1. General configuration of speaker device]
The speaker device 400 used in the second gaming machine is a speaker device in which two speaker units (a first speaker unit 500 and a second speaker unit 600) emitting the same sound wave band are arranged coaxially, and an outline of the speaker device 400 will be described below with reference to Figures 36 (a) to (c).

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the speaker device 400 includes a first speaker unit 500 and a second speaker unit 600 housed (attached) in a housing ("cabinet G" in FIG. 1) 401 in which a circular opening 411 shown in FIG. 36(b) is formed. The first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 emit the same sound wave band, and the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 use dynamic speaker units of the same structure that output waveforms of the same shape. In the second gaming machine, the speaker device 400 is housed in the housing 401, but the speaker device 400 may be housed (attached) in a front door ("upper door mechanism UD" or "lower door mechanism DD" in FIG. 1) in which an opening equivalent to the opening 411 is formed.

The first speaker unit 500 has the structure of a typical dynamic speaker unit, and the outline of the first speaker unit 500 will be briefly explained below with reference to FIG. 36(c).

The first speaker unit 500 has a yoke 502 consisting of a disk-shaped portion 502a with a central axis 501 as its central axis and a cylindrical portion 502b with a central axis 501 as its central axis. In the first speaker unit 500, a cylindrical bobbin 504 with a central axis 501 and an electromagnetic coil (also called a "voice coil") 503 wound thereon is arranged in the portion 502b of the yoke 502, and a cylindrical magnet 505, a cylindrical plate 506, and a cylindrical ring 507, each with a central axis 501 as its central axis, are arranged around the bobbin 504. The first speaker unit 500 also has a damper 508 connected to the bobbin 504 and the ring 507. The first speaker unit 500 is provided with a frame 509 attached to the ring 507, and the frame 509 has an annular shape with the central axis 501 as a central axis in a plan view of the first speaker unit 500 seen from one direction of the central axis 501. The first speaker unit 500 is provided with a cone paper (diaphragm) 510 attached to the bobbin 504, and the cone paper (diaphragm) 510 has an annular shape with the central axis 501 as a central axis in a plan view of the first speaker unit 500 seen from one direction of the central axis 501. The first speaker unit 500 is provided with a center cap 511, and the center cap 511 has a circular shape with the central axis 501 as a central axis in a plan view of the first speaker unit 500 seen from one direction of the central axis 501. In addition, the first speaker unit 500 has an edge 512 between the frame 509 and the cone paper (diaphragm) 510, and the edge 512 has a circular ring shape with the central axis 501 as the central axis in a plan view of the first speaker unit 500 seen from one direction of the central axis 501. In the first speaker unit 500 having the above structure, when a current is passed through the electromagnetic coil 503, the cone paper (diaphragm) 510 vibrates and produces sound waves.

The second speaker unit 600 has the same structure as the first speaker unit 500 shown in FIG. 36(c), that is, a typical dynamic speaker unit.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), a case 402 consisting of a cylindrical portion with a central axis 450 as its central axis and a conical portion with a central axis 450 as its central axis is arranged in the housing 401. The first speaker unit 500 is arranged on the central axis 450 so that the central axis 501 in FIG. 36(c) coincides with the central axis 450 of the circular opening 410 shown in FIGS. 36(a) and (b), and is housed in the case 402.

The second speaker unit 600 is housed in the housing 401 and is arranged on the central axis 450 so that the first speaker unit 500 is in the direction of radiating sound waves and the central axis 501 in FIG. 36(c) coincides with the central axis 450 of the circular opening 410 shown in FIGS. 36(a) and (b).

Although not shown in Figures 36(a) and (b), the first speaker unit 500 is supported and fixed to the housing 401 by multiple (2 to 6) frames of a size that does not impede the radiation of sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 600. In addition, the first speaker unit 500 may be fixed to the second speaker unit 600 by multiple (2 to 6) frames, and the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 may be housed in the housing 401 as a single speaker unit.

The sound waves emitted by the first speaker unit 500 are output to the outside of the housing 401 from a circular first opening portion 412 of the opening 411 with the central axis 450 shown in FIG. 36(b) as the central axis. The sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 600 are output to the outside of the housing 401 from a circular second opening portion 413 of the opening 411 with the central axis 450 shown in FIG. 36(b) as the central axis.

In addition, since the tone of the sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 600 changes depending on the internal structure of the speaker device 400, it is preferable to achieve tone consistency between the sound waves emitted by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit by using an FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filter or an equalizer under the control of the second amplifier 802 or sub-CPU 201 that outputs an audio signal or audio data to the second speaker unit 600 side.

[10.2. Directionality
In the second gaming machine, the speaker device 400 controls the speaker unit that outputs sound waves out of the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600, and controls the timing of outputting sound waves by the first speaker unit 500. By controlling the timing of the sound wave output by the second speaker unit 600 and the frequency response of the first speaker unit 601, it is possible to realize each of the directivities shown in Figs. 37(a) to (c). 37(b) will be described as "converging directivity", the directivity in FIG. 37(b) will be described as "diffusing directivity", and the directivity in FIG. 37(c) will be described as "normal directivity".

The control of the timing of sound wave output to realize each directivity and the control of the speaker unit that outputs the sound waves are controlled by the sub-CPU 201, so the sub-CPU 201 constitutes a control means. Specifically, the processing is performed based on the control of the sound control processing (not shown) of each performance control execution processing of S304, S306, and S307 in FIG. 33, and the sub-CPU 201 outputs the same sound data to the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600.

For ease of explanation, the following description will be given using a plane cut model in which the speaker device 400 is cut at one plane (xy plane) including the central axis 450. Note that the portion of the plane cut model that corresponds to the circular first opening portion 412 in Fig. 36(b) is described as the first opening portion 420, one of the portions that correspond to the annular second opening portion 413 in Fig. 36(b) is described as the upper second opening portion 421, and the other is described as the lower second opening portion 422. In addition, in the explanation using the planar cut model, the first sound wave emitted by the first speaker unit 500 and output from the first opening 420 to the outside of the housing 401 is described as the first sound wave 550, the second sound wave emitted by the second speaker unit 600 is described as the second sound wave 650, the second sound wave 650 output from the upper second opening 421 to the outside of the housing 401 is described as the upper second sound wave 651, and the second sound wave 650 output from the lower second opening 422 to the outside of the housing 401 is described as the lower second sound wave 652.

In the explanation of the plane cut model, for convenience, the first sound wave 550 is assumed to spread uniformly in a semicircle around a point P101 (hereinafter referred to as the "first sound wave output point P101"; see Figures 39 and 40) on the central axis 450 of the first opening portion 420, which is also the center of the tip portion of the first speaker unit 500. The upper second sound wave 651 is assumed to spread uniformly in a semicircle around a central point P102 (hereinafter referred to as the "upper second sound wave output point P102"; see Figures 38 to 40) in the y-axis direction of the upper second opening portion 421, and the lower second sound wave 652 is assumed to spread uniformly in a semicircle around a central point P103 (hereinafter referred to as the "lower second sound wave output point P103"; see Figures 38 to 40) in the y-axis direction of the lower second opening portion 422. In reality, the first sound wave 550 spreads from the first opening 412 in a generally spherical shape, and the second sound wave 650 spreads from the second opening 413 in a generally donut shape. Also, the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 are assumed to have the same wavelength (same frequency).

In addition, since the speaker device 400 has a structure symmetrical with respect to the central axis 450, the timing at which the upper second sound wave 651 is output from the upper second opening 421 to the outside of the housing 401 is the same as the timing at which the lower second sound wave 652 is output from the lower second opening 422 to the outside of the housing 401. In addition, the distance traveled by the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 in the positive direction of the x-axis is the same as the distance traveled by the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652.

[10.2.1. Overview of directivity]
Hereinafter, an outline of each directivity that can be realized by the speaker device 400 will be described with reference to Figures 37(a) to (c). The tip of the arrow of each sound wave 550, 651, 652 in Figures 37(a) to (c) typically indicates the tip of the leading surface of each sound wave 550, 651, 652 in the x-axis direction at a certain timing.

[10.2.1.1. Overview of convergence directivity]
37(a), the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 are made to advance further in the positive direction of the x-axis than the leading surface of the first sound wave 550. Furthermore, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 is made to intersect with the leading surfaces of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 on the central axis 450 where the leading surfaces of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 intersect.

In this way, the first sound wave 550 becomes in phase (combined) with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 approximately on the central axis 450, and they reinforce each other, and this reinforced portion moves in the positive direction of the x-axis approximately on the central axis 450 over time (see arrow 710 in Figure 39(a)). In this case, the sound is loudest near the central axis 450.

The line connecting the leading surface of the first sound wave 550, the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651, and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 forms the inward directional wave front 700, the image of which is shown in Figure 37 (a).

[10.2.1.2. Overview of diffusion directionality]
In the diffusion directivity of Fig. 37 (b), the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 advances further in the positive direction of the x-axis than the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652. Furthermore, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at a point where the y-axis value is greater than the y-axis value of the upper second sound wave output point P102 (the center point of the upper second opening portion 421 in the y-axis direction) in a plan view of the speaker device 400 seen from one direction of the central axis 450. The leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at a point where the y-axis value is smaller than the y-axis value of the lower second sound wave output point P103 (the center point of the lower second opening portion 422 in the y-axis direction) in a plan view of the speaker device 400 seen from one direction of the central axis 450. Furthermore, the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 are located symmetrically with respect to the central axis 450.

In this way, the first sound wave 550 becomes in phase (combined) with the upper second sound wave 651 at the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651, and they reinforce each other, and this reinforced part 700A moves in a direction in which the x-axis value increases and the y-axis value increases over time (see arrow 710A in FIG. 40(a)). The sound is loudest near this reinforced part 700A. Also, the first sound wave 550 becomes in phase (combined) with the lower second sound wave 652 at the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652, and they reinforce each other, and this reinforced part 700B moves in a direction in which the x-axis value increases and the y-axis value decreases over time (see arrow 710B in FIG. 40(a)). The sound is loudest near this reinforced part 700B.

[10.2.1.3. Overview of normal directivity]
37(c), the first speaker unit 500 emits a first sound wave 550, which is output from the first opening 420 to the outside of the housing 401. On the other hand, the second speaker unit 600 does not emit a second sound wave 650, which is not output from the upper second opening 421 to the outside of the housing 401, and not output from the lower second opening 422 to the outside of the housing 401.

In this way, the first sound wave 550 spreads uniformly in a semicircular shape, similar to the directionality of sound waves from a single dynamic speaker unit.

10.2.2. Directivity Control
The control for realizing each of the directivities shown in FIGS. 37(a) to (c) will be described below.

[10.2.2.1.2 Wave (Upper Second Sound Wave, Lower Second Sound Wave) Interference]
37(a) to (c), interference between the upper second sound wave 651 output from the upper second opening portion 421 to the outside of the housing 401 and the lower second sound wave 652 output from the lower second opening portion 422 to the outside of the housing 401 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Note that in Fig. 38, for the second sound wave 650, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652, which are compressional waves, the dense parts of the compressional waves are shown by solid lines, and the sparse parts of the compressional waves are shown by dotted lines.

The second sound wave 650 emitted by the second speaker unit 600 is output to the outside of the housing 401 from the upper second opening 421 and the lower second opening 422. At the same timing, the phase of the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) output to the outside of the housing 401 from the upper second opening 421 is the same as the phase of the second sound wave 650 (lower second sound wave 652) output to the outside of the housing 401 from the lower second opening 422.

The upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 interfere with each other, strengthening or weakening each other. For example, when the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, the composite wave of the two sound waves 651 and 652 is strongest, and when the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in antiphase, the composite wave of the two sound waves 651 and 652 is weakest. At each point on the central axis 450, the distance from the upper second sound wave output point P102 of the upper second opening portion 421 and the distance from the lower second sound wave output point P103 of the lower second opening portion 422 are equal, so the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, and the composite wave of the two sound waves 651 and 652 is strongest.

Regarding the interference fringes created by the interference between the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, at points P201, P203a, and P203b where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, the energy of the composite wave of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 becomes large (these become the antinodes of the waveform of the interference fringes). Also, at points P202a and P202b where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in antiphase, the energy of the composite wave becomes small (these become the nodes of the waveform of the interference fringes). Also, the energy of the composite wave becomes small from point P201 to point P202a, and the energy of the composite wave becomes large from point P202a to point P203a. In addition, the energy of the composite wave decreases from point P201 to point P202b, and increases from point P202b to point P203b. In addition, because sound waves attenuate as they travel, the energy of the composite wave at points P203a and P203b is smaller than the energy of the composite wave at point P201.

The antinode of the interference fringes where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase is given by Y = n x L x λ/d. However, the first sound wave output point P101 (the first sound wave output point P101 is the midpoint between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the lower second sound wave output point P103) is set to (x, y) = (0, 0). Y is the y-axis value of the antinode. n is an integer. d is the distance between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the lower second sound wave output point P103 (hereinafter referred to as the "second opening distance"). L is the distance in the positive x-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101 of the interference fringes. λ is the wavelength of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652. It is assumed that L is sufficiently larger than d. The y-axis values Y of points P201, P203a, and P203b are Y = 0, L x λ/d, and -L x λ/d. Also, the smaller the second aperture separation distance d, the larger the distance between two adjacent antinodes of the interference fringes.

10.2.2.2. Control of Convergence Directivity
The control relating to the convergence directivity of FIG. 37(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 39(a).

The leading surface of the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) output by the second speaker unit 600 and output from the upper second opening 421 to the outside of the housing 401 and the leading surface of the second sound wave 650 (lower second sound wave 652) output by the second speaker unit 600 and output from the lower second opening 422 to the outside of the housing 401 intersect on the central axis 450. At each point on the central axis 450, the distance from the upper second sound wave output point P102 of the upper second opening 421 and the distance from the lower second sound wave output point P103 of the lower second opening 422 are equal, so the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, and the composite wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 is strongest.

The leading surface of the first sound wave 550, which has the same waveform shape as the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wave field synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450. In other words, the first sound wave 550 overlaps with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 in phase at the first wave field synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450. In this way, the synthesis wave of the three waves, the first sound wave 550, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652, is strongest at the first wave field synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450.

The line connecting the leading surface of the first sound wave 550, the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651, and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 becomes a directional wavefront, resulting in an inward directional wavefront 700 as shown in the image in Figure 37(a), thereby realizing the convergence directionality of Figure 37(a).

In the control to realize the convergence directivity, in order to make the three sound waves, the first sound wave 550, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652, in phase at the first wave field synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450, the sub-CPU 201 performs control to delay the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 from the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wave field synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450, in other words, so that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the first wave field synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450 simultaneously with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652.

A specific example of the delay time TA (ms) for delaying the timing of the first sound wave 550 output by the first speaker unit 500 from the timing of the second sound wave 650 output by the second speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 39(b). Here, the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the second sound wave output point P104, which is the center of the tip of the second speaker unit 600 in the y-axis direction, is E (mm). The distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the upper second sound wave output point P102, and the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the lower second sound wave output point P103 are D (mm).

The point at which the distance in the x-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101 is F (mm) and the distance in the y-axis direction is 0 (mm) is defined as the first wave front synthesis point P301 on the above-mentioned central axis 450 where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652.

The distance R (mm) that the second sound wave 650 travels before being output outside the housing 401 (the distance between the second sound wave output point P104 and the upper second sound wave output point P102, and the distance between the second sound wave output point P104 and the lower second sound wave output point P103) is R = ( ^D2 + ^E2 ) ^1/2 .

The distance S (mm) of the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) traveling from the output to the outside of the housing 401 until it reaches the first wave field synthesis point P301 (the distance between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the first wave field synthesis point P301) and the distance S (mm) of the second sound wave 650 (lower second sound wave 652) traveling from the output to the outside of the housing 401 until it reaches the first wave field synthesis point P301 (the distance between the lower second sound wave output point P103 and the first wave field synthesis point P301) are S = (D ² + F ² ) ^1/2 . The distance T (mm) of the first sound wave 550 traveling from the output to the outside of the housing 401 until it reaches the first wave field synthesis point P301 (the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the first wave field synthesis point P301) are T = F. For this reason, outside the housing 401, the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 travel a distance S-T=( ^D2 + ^F2 ) ^1/2 -F further than the first sound wave 550. Therefore, the distance Y (mm) that the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 travel in the positive direction of the x-axis further than the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 is Y=( ^D2 + ^F2 ) ^1/2 -F.

In order for the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 to intersect with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wave front synthesis point P301, the second sound wave 650 must travel R + Y = (D ² + E ² ) ^1/2 + ((D ² + F ² ) ^1/2 - F) further than the first sound wave 550.

Therefore, when the sound speed is v (mm/ms), the delay time TA (ms) for delaying the timing of the first sound wave 550 output by the first speaker unit 500 from the timing of the second sound wave 650 output by the second speaker unit 600 is TA = (R + Y) / v = ((D ² + E ² ) ^1/2 + ((D ² + F ² ) ^1/2 - F)) / v, where v = 340 (mm/ms).

In the above-mentioned control of the convergence directionality, if the delay time for the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 to intersect with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at a certain wavelength at the first wave field synthesis point P301 is TA, the above-mentioned delay time for the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 to intersect with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the same first wave field synthesis point P301 at another wavelength will be the same TA. Therefore, the same delay time TA can be used for each wavelength in the band of the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650.

In FIG. 39(a), at points P203a and P203b where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase in the interference fringes of FIG. 38 where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 are in phase and reinforce each other, the first sound wave 550 is in approximately opposite phase to the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652. Therefore, by adding the first sound wave 550 to the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, the loop of the waveform of the interference fringes formed by the interference between the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 can be made wider.

10.2.2.3. Diffusion Directional Control
The control relating to the diffusion directivity in FIG. 37(b) will be described with reference to FIG. 40(a).

The leading surface of the first sound wave 550, which has the same waveform as the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A, which has a larger y-axis value than the y-axis value of the upper second sound wave output point P102 in a plan view of the speaker device 400 seen from one direction of the central axis 450. In other words, the first sound wave 550 overlaps with the upper second sound wave 651 in phase at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A. In this way, the synthesis wave of the two waves, the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651, is strongest at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A. In FIG. 40(a), the line with a constant y-axis value passing through the upper second sound wave output point P102 is indicated by a dotted line 451.

When the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the lower second wave field synthesis point P302B, which has a smaller y-axis value than the y-axis value of the lower second sound wave output point P103, which is symmetrical to the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A with respect to the central axis 450 in a plan view of the speaker device 400 seen from one direction of the central axis 450. In this case, the synthesis wave of the two waves, the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652, is strongest at the lower second wave field synthesis point P302B. In FIG. 40(a), the line with a constant y-axis value passing through the lower second sound wave output point P103 is indicated by a dotted line 452.

In the actual speaker device 400, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 output from the first opening 412 to the outside of the housing 401 and the leading surface of the second sound wave 650 output from the second opening 413 to the outside of the housing 401 intersect at a circular wave field synthesis line (the radius of the circle formed by the wave field synthesis line is larger than the radius of the circle formed by the middle line) that is outside the circular midline between the outer and inner circles of the annular second opening 413 in a plan view of the speaker device 400 seen from one direction of the central axis 450. In this case, the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 reinforce each other at the above-mentioned wave field synthesis line.

In the control to achieve diffusion directionality, in order to bring the two sound waves, the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651, into the same phase at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A and the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652, into the same phase at the lower second wave field synthesis point P302B, the sub-CPU 201 performs control to adjust the timing of the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A and the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the lower second wave field synthesis point P302B. In other words, the sub-CPU 201 performs control to adjust the timing of the first sound wave 550 output by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the second sound wave 650 output by the second speaker unit 600 so that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A simultaneously with the upper second sound wave 651, and the first sound wave 550 arrives at the lower second wave field synthesis point P302B simultaneously with the lower second sound wave 652.

A specific example of adjustment of the timing of output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(b). In the description with reference to FIG. 40(b), the upper second sound wave 651 of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 will be described, but the same description applies to the lower second sound wave 652. Here, the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the second sound wave output point P104 is E (mm), and the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the upper second sound wave output point P102 is D (mm).

The point that is G (mm) away from the first sound wave output point P101 in the x-axis direction and H (mm) away from the first sound wave output point P101 in the y-axis direction is defined as the upper second wave front synthesis point P302A, where the leading edge of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading edge of the upper second sound wave 651.

The distance R (mm) that the second sound wave 650 travels before being output to the outside of the housing 401 (the distance between the second sound wave output point P104 and the upper second sound wave output point P102) is given by R=(D ² +E ² ) ^1/2 .

The distance U (mm) that the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) travels from when it is output outside the housing 401 to when it reaches the upper second wave field combination point P302A (the distance between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the upper second wave field combination point P302A) is U = (G ² + (H - D) ² ) ^1/2 . The distance W (mm) that the first sound wave 550 travels from when it is output outside the housing 401 to when it reaches the upper second wave field combination point P302A (the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the upper second wave field combination point P302A) is W = (G ² + H ² ) ^1/2 . For this reason, outside the housing 401, the first sound wave 550 travels WU = ((G ² + H ² ) ^1/2 - (G ² + (H-D) ² ) ^1/2 ) further than the upper second sound wave 651. Therefore, the distance Z (mm) that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 travels in the positive direction of the x-axis further than the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 is Z = (G ² + H ² ) ^1/2 - (G ² + (H-D) ² ) ^1/2 .

In order for the leading surface of first sound wave 550 to intersect with the leading surface of upper second sound wave 651 at upper second wave front synthesis point P302A, if R-Z<0, first sound wave 550 must travel Z-R = ((G ² + H ² ) ^1/2 - (G ² + (H-D) ² ) ^1/2 ) - (D ² + E ² ) ^1/2 further than second sound wave 650. Therefore, if the speed of sound is v (mm/ms), the delay time TB1 (ms) that delays the timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 from the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is TB1 = (Z-R)/v = ((( ^G2 + ^H2 ) ¹ /2-( ^G2 +(H-D) ² ) ^1/2 )-( ^D2 + ^E2 ) ^1/2 )/v.

When R-Z>0, the second sound wave 650 needs to travel R-Z=( ^D2 + ^E2 ) ^1/2 -(( ^G2 + ^H2 ) ^1/2- ( ^G2 +(H-D) ² ) ^1/2 ) further than the first sound wave 550. Therefore, the delay time TB2 (ms) by which the timing of the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed from the timing of the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 is TB2=(R-Z)/v=(( ^D2 + ^E2 ) ^1/2 -(( ^G2 + ^H2 ) ^1/2- ( ^G2 +(H-D) ² ) ^1/2 ))/v.

When R-Z=0, the distance traveled by the first sound wave 550 and the distance traveled by the second sound wave 650 must be the same. Therefore, the timing at which the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing at which the second sound wave 650 is output by the second speaker unit 600 must be the same.

In the control related to the directionality of the diffusion described above, if the time difference between the timing of output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A at a certain wavelength is TB1 when R-Z<0, TB2 when R-Z>0, and 0 (no time difference) when R-Z=0, then the time difference for the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 to intersect with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the same upper second wave field synthesis point P302A at another wavelength is TB1 when R-Z<0, TB2 when R-Z>0, and 0 (no time difference) when R-Z=0. Therefore, the same time difference can be used for each wavelength in the bands of the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650.

10.2.2.4. Normal Directivity Control
In the normal directivity control of Figure 37 (c), the sub-CPU 201 controls so that the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500, but controls so that the second sound wave 650 is not output by the second speaker unit 600.

[10.2.3. Example of circuits related to directivity control]
Hereinafter, a circuit example relating to the control of each directivity of Figures 37(a) to (c) will be described with reference to Figure 41. In the circuit example of Figure 41, the second gaming machine has two speaker devices 400 of Figure 36 on the left and right when viewed from the front of the second gaming machine, and the left and right speaker devices 400 are arranged facing the player playing the second gaming machine. Note that the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 of the left speaker device 400 are described as the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the second speaker unit (left) 600L, and the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 of the right speaker device 400 are described as the first speaker unit (right) 500R and the second speaker unit (right) 600R.

In the second gaming machine, when the first of the multiple performances is performed, the speaker device 400 is controlled to have a convergent directivity as shown in FIG. 37(a), when the second of the multiple performances is performed, the speaker device 400 is controlled to have a diffuse directivity as shown in FIG. 37(b), and when the third of the multiple performances is performed, the speaker device 400 is controlled to have a normal directivity as shown in FIG. 37(c). The first performance is mainly directed to the player playing the second gaming machine, and examples of the first performance include a suggestion of a bonus winning role and a push order navigation in an AT state. The second performance is mainly directed to other people other than the player near the second gaming machine, and examples of the second performance include a notification performance that the medal payout is in excellent condition, a notification performance that the bonus game is in a bonus game state, and a notification performance that the AT state is in an AT state, which are notification performances that are intended for the gaming establishment to appeal to other people. The third effect is directed at people around the second gaming machine, such as the player playing the second gaming machine and other people near the second gaming machine, and examples of the third effect include a notification effect that medal payout is at its best, a notification effect that the game is in a bonus gaming state, and a notification effect that the game is in an AT state. Note that specific examples of the second and third effects overlap, but for example, a diffuse directivity is used for the notification effect that medal payout is at its best, and a normal directivity is used for the notification effect that the game is in a bonus gaming state and the notification effect that the game is in an AT state.

In the circuit example of FIG. 41, the time from when the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 901 until the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500 is the same as the time from when the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 904 until the second sound wave 650 is output by the second speaker unit 600.

10.2.3.1. Convergence Directivity Control
In controlling the convergence directivity, as explained using Figure 39 (a), the timing of the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by a delay time TA (ms) from the timing of the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wave field synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs a control signal related to the amplification level to be set in the first amplifier 800 and a control signal related to the amplification level to be set in the second amplifier 801 to the control line 900. This sets the amplification level in the first amplifier 800 and the second amplifier 801. Specifically, based on a volume switch (not shown) provided in the sub-control circuit 200 or a volume selected by the player (5 levels), the sub-CPU 201 outputs the selected volume as the amplification level to the first amplifier 800 and the second amplifier 801. Also, when the sub-CPU 201 is started (when the power is turned on), a predetermined amplification level may be output and set, and the amplification level may be included in the audio data that the sub-CPU 201 outputs to the data line 901 and the data line 904.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) for the speaker device 400 on the left side when looking at the second gaming machine from the front, and the second audio data (right) for the speaker device 400 on the right side when looking at the second gaming machine from the front, to the data line 904. The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc. from the channel ch0 to the signal line (speaker line L) 905, and the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905. In addition, the second audio data (right) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (right) obtained by amplification, etc. from channel ch1 to a signal line (speaker line R) 906, and the second speaker unit (right) 600R outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to the signal line 906.

After the sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904, when the delay sample number SampleA corresponding to the above-mentioned delay time TA (ms) in the model described in FIG. 39(b) has elapsed, the sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) for the speaker device 400 on the left side when looking at the second gaming machine from the front and the first audio data (right) for the speaker device 400 on the right side when looking at the second gaming machine from the front to the data line 901. The first audio data (left) is the same audio data as the second audio data (left), and the first audio data (right) is the same audio data as the second audio data (right). Here, the delay sample number SampleA is SampleA = TA x Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms). In a 48 kHz system, the rate is 48 (samples/ms). The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, which outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc., from the channel CH0 to the signal line (speaker line L) 902, and the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902. The first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, which outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification, etc., from the channel CH1 to the signal line (speaker line R) 903, and the first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903.

By the above processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R is delayed by the delay time TA from the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R.

10.2.3.2. Control of diffusion directionality
In controlling the diffusion directionality, as explained using Figure 40 (a), the timing of outputting the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of outputting the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are adjusted so that the leading face of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading face of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A, which has a larger y-axis value than the y-axis value of the upper second sound wave output point P102, when viewed in a planar view of the speaker device 400 from one direction of the central axis 450.

In the model described using Figure 40 (b), when R-Z<0, the situation is as follows. The sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901. The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, which outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification etc. from channel CH0 to the signal line 902, and the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902. In addition, the first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification, etc. from channel CH1 to the signal line 903, and the first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903.

After the sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901, when the number of delayed samples SampleB1, which corresponds to the delay time TB1 (ms) in the model described in FIG. 40(b), has elapsed, the sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904. The second audio data (left) is the same audio data as the first audio data (left), and the second audio data (right) is the same audio data as the first audio data (right). Here, the number of delayed samples SampleB1 is SampleB1=TB1×Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms). The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from channel ch0 to signal line 905, and the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905. Also, the second audio data (right) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like from channel ch1 to signal line 906, and the second speaker unit (right) 600R outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to the signal line 906.

By the above processing, the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R is delayed by a delay time TB1 from the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R.

In the model described using Figure 40 (b), when R-Z>0, the situation is as follows. The sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904. The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, which outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification etc. from channel ch0 to the signal line 905, and the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905. In addition, the second audio data (right) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (right) obtained by amplification, etc. from channel ch1 to the signal line 906, and the second speaker unit (right) 600R outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to the signal line 906.

After the sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904, when the number of delayed samples SampleB2, which corresponds to the delay time TB2 (ms) in the model described in FIG. 40(b), has elapsed, the sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901. The first audio data (left) is the same audio data as the second audio data (left), and the first audio data (right) is the same audio data as the second audio data (right). Here, the number of delayed samples SampleB2 is SampleB2 = TB2 x Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms). The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, which outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from channel CH0 to signal line 902, and the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to signal line 902. The first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, which outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like from channel CH1 to signal line 903, and the first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to signal line 903.

By the above processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R is delayed by a delay time TB2 from the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R.

In the model described using Figure 40 (b), when R-Z = 0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901. The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, which outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification etc. from channel CH0 to the signal line 902, and the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902. In addition, the first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification, etc. from channel CH1 to the signal line 903, and the first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904 at the same timing as the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) are output to the data line 904. The second audio data (left) is the same audio data as the first audio data (left), and the second audio data (right) is the same audio data as the first audio data (right). The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc. from the channel ch0 to the signal line 905, and the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905. In addition, the second audio data (right) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (right) obtained by amplification, etc. from channel ch1 to the signal line 906, and the second speaker unit (right) 600R outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to the signal line 906.

By the above processing, the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R, and the second sound wave 650 is output by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R at the same time.

10.2.3.3. Normal directivity control
In normal directivity control, the second sound wave 650 is not output by the second speaker unit 600, and the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901. The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, which outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc. from channel CH0 to signal line 902, and the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902. In addition, the first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, which outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification, etc. from channel CH1 to signal line 903, and the first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903.

The sub-CPU 201 does not output the second audio data (left) that is the same as the first audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) that is the same as the first audio data (right) to the data line 904. As a result, the second speaker unit 600 does not output the second sound wave 650.

[10.2.4. Variation 1 of the circuit related to directivity control]
A first modified example of the circuit relating to the control of each directivity of Figures 37(a) to (c) will be described below with reference to Figure 42. In the first modified example of the circuit of Figure 42, the second gaming machine has one speaker device 400 of Figure 36, and the speaker device 400 is arranged facing a player playing on the second gaming machine.

In the circuit example of FIG. 42, the time from when the amplifier 810 outputs an audio signal to the signal line 912 until the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500 is the same as the time from when the amplifier 810 outputs an audio signal to the signal line 913 until the second sound wave 650 is output by the second speaker unit 600.

10.2.4.1. Convergence Directivity Control
The sub-CPU 201 outputs to the control line 910 a control signal related to the amplification level set in the amplifier 810, a control signal related to a first delay sample number corresponding to the delay time by which the audio data output from channel Ch0 is delayed, and a control signal related to a second delay sample number corresponding to the delay time by which the audio data output from channel Ch1 is delayed. In this way, the amplification level, the first delay sample number, and the second delay sample number are set in the amplifier 810.

In controlling the convergence directivity in the model described using FIG. 39(b), the sub-CPU 201 sets the first delay sample number and the second delay sample number in the amplifier 810 so that the first delay sample number is greater than the second delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleA, which corresponds to the delay time TA described above. Here, the delay sample number SampleA is SampleA=TA×Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms).

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911. The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., by the number of second delay samples and outputs it from channel Ch1 to signal line 913. The second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 913. The amplifier 810 also delays the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., by the number of first delay samples and outputs it from channel Ch0 to signal line 912. The output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch0 to signal line 912 is delayed by the number of delay samples SampleA, which corresponds to the delay time TA, from the output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch1 to signal line 913. The first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 912. With this process, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by the delay time TA from the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600.

10.2.4.2. Control of diffusion directionality
In the control of diffusion directivity in the model described using Figure 40 (b), when R-Z<0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 sets the first delay sample number and the second delay sample number in the amplifier 810 so that the second delay sample number is greater than the first delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB1 corresponding to the above-mentioned delay time TB1. Here, the delay sample number SampleB1 is SampleB1=TB1×Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms).

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911. The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., by the number of first delay samples and outputs it from channel Ch0 to signal line 912. The first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 912. The amplifier 810 also delays the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., by the number of second delay samples and outputs it from channel Ch1 to signal line 913. The output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch1 to signal line 913 is delayed by the number of delay samples SampleB1, which corresponds to the delay time TB1, from the output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch0 to signal line 912. The second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 913. With this process, the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 is delayed by the delay time TB1 from the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500.

In the model described using FIG. 40(b), when R-Z>0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 sets the first delay sample number and the second delay sample number in the amplifier 810 so that the first delay sample number is greater than the second delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB2, which corresponds to the delay time TB2 described above. Here, the delay sample number SampleB2 is SampleB2=TB2×Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms).

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911. The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., by the number of second delay samples and outputs it from channel Ch1 to signal line 913. The second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 913. The amplifier 810 also delays the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., by the number of first delay samples and outputs it from channel Ch0 to signal line 912. The output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch0 to signal line 912 is delayed by the number of delay samples SampleB2, which corresponds to the delay time TB2, from the output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch1 to signal line 913. The first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 912. With this process, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by the delay time TB2 from the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600.

In the model described using FIG. 40(b), when R-Z=0, the following occurs: The sub-CPU 201 sets the same number of first delay samples and second delay samples to the amplifier 810.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911. The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of first delay samples and outputs it from channel Ch0 to signal line 912. The first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 912. The amplifier 810 also delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of second delay samples and outputs it from channel Ch1 to signal line 913. The output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch1 to signal line 913 is the same as the output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch0 to signal line 912. The second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 913. With this process, the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 and the second speaker unit 600 output the second sound wave 650 at the same time.

10.2.4.3. Normal directivity control
In normal directivity control, the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to a data line 911. The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data, and outputs an audio signal obtained by amplification or the like from channel Ch0 to a signal line 912. The first speaker unit 500 outputs a first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 912. The amplifier 810 does not output an audio signal obtained by amplification or the like from channel Ch1 to a signal line 913, and the second speaker unit 600 does not output a second sound wave 650.

[10.2.5. Modification 2 of the circuit related to directivity control]
A second modification of the circuit relating to the control of each directivity of Figures 37(a) to (c) will be described below with reference to Figure 43. In the second modification of the circuit of Figure 43, the second gaming machine has one speaker device 400 of Figure 36, and the speaker device 400 is arranged facing a player playing on the second gaming machine.

In the circuit example of FIG. 43, the time from when the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921 until it is input to the first delay circuit 851 is the same as the time from when the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921 until it is input to the second delay circuit 852. Also, the time from when the first delay circuit 851 outputs audio data to the data line 923 until the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500 is the same as the time from when the second delay circuit 852 outputs audio data to the data line 924 until the second sound wave 650 is output by the second speaker unit 600.

10.2.5.1. Convergence Directivity Control
The sub-CPU 201 outputs to the control line 920 a control signal related to the on/off setting of the switch 830, a control signal related to a first delay sample number corresponding to the delay time by which the audio data is delayed in the first delay circuit 851, a control signal related to a second delay sample number corresponding to the delay time by which the audio data is delayed in the second delay circuit 852, a control signal related to the amplification degree to be set in the first amplifier 821, and a control signal related to the amplification degree to be set in the second amplifier 822. As a result, the switch 830 is set on or off, the first delay sample number is set in the first delay circuit 851, the second delay sample number is set in the second delay circuit 852, the amplification degree is set in the first amplifier 821, and the amplification degree is set in the second amplifier 822.

In controlling the convergence directivity in the model described using FIG. 39(b), the sub-CPU 201 sets the switch 830 to ON. The sub-CPU 201 also sets the first delay sample number to the first delay circuit 851 and sets the second delay sample number to the second delay circuit 852 so that the first delay sample number is greater than the second delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleA corresponding to the above-mentioned delay time TA. Here, the delay sample number SampleA is SampleA=TA×Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms).

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921. The audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851, and then input to the second delay circuit 852 from the data line 922 via the switch 830.

The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by the second delay sample number and outputs it to the data line 924. The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, which outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc. to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 926. In addition, the first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by the first delay sample number and outputs it to the data line 923. The output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923 is delayed by the number of delay samples SampleA corresponding to the delay time TA from the output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, which outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc. to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 925. Due to this processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by the delay time TA from the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600.

10.2.5.2. Control of diffusion directionality
In the control of diffusion directivity in the model described using FIG. 40(b), when R-Z<0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 sets the switch 830 to ON. The sub-CPU 201 also sets the first delay sample number to the first delay circuit 851 and sets the second delay sample number to the second delay circuit 852 so that the second delay sample number is greater than the first delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB1 corresponding to the above-mentioned delay time TB1. Here, the delay sample number SampleB1 is SampleB1=TB1×Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms).

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921. The audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851, and then input to the second delay circuit 852 from the data line 922 via the switch 830.

The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by the first delay sample number and outputs it to the data line 923. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, which outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc. to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 925. The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by the second delay sample number and outputs it to the data line 924. The output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924 is delayed by the delay sample number SampleB1 corresponding to the delay time TB1 from the output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923. The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, which outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc. to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 926. With this processing, the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 is delayed by a delay time TB1 from the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500.

In the model described using FIG. 40(b), when R-Z>0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 sets the switch 830 to ON. The sub-CPU 201 also sets the first delay sample number to the first delay circuit 851 and sets the second delay sample number to the second delay circuit 852 so that the first delay sample number is greater than the second delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB2, which corresponds to the delay time TB2. Here, the delay sample number SampleB2 is SampleB2=TB2×Rate, where Rate is the sampling rate (sample/ms).

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921. The audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851, and then input to the second delay circuit 852 from the data line 922 via the switch 830.

The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by the second delay sample number and outputs it to the data line 924. The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, which outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc. to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 926. The first delay circuit 851 also delays the input audio data by the first delay sample number and outputs it to the data line 923. The output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923 is delayed by the number of delay samples SampleB2, which corresponds to the delay time TB2, from the output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, which outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc. to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 925. Due to this processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by a delay time TB2 from the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600.

In the model described using FIG. 40(b), when R-Z=0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 sets the switch 830 to ON. The sub-CPU 201 also sets the first delay sample number in the first delay circuit 851, and sets the second delay sample number, which is the same as the first delay sample number, in the second delay circuit 852.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921. The audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851, and then input to the second delay circuit 852 from the data line 922 via the switch 830.

The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by the number of first delay samples and outputs it to the data line 923. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, which outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc. to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 925. In addition, the second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by the number of second delay samples and outputs it to the data line 924. The output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924 is the same as the output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923. The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, which outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc. to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 926. With this processing, the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 and the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 at the same time.

10.2.5.3. Normal Directivity Control
In normal directivity control, the sub CPU 201 sets the switch 830 to OFF. The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to a data line 921, and the audio data output to the data line 921 is input to a first delay circuit 851. The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data and outputs it to a data line 923. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by a first amplifier 821, and the first amplifier 821 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to a signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs a first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 925.

On the other hand, because the switch 830 is off, no audio data is input to the second delay circuit 852. As a result, the second sound wave 650 is not output by the second speaker unit 600.

[10.3. Effect of the Second Gaming Machine]
According to the second gaming machine described above, the speaker device 400 having a structure in which the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 are arranged on the central axis 450 is less subject to the constraints of the horizontal or vertical size of the second gaming machine compared to a case in which a plurality of speaker units are arranged in an array. By using such a speaker device 400, the desired directivity can be realized with the speaker device 400 by simple control of adjusting the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 arrive at the wave field synthesis point outside the housing 401 at the same time.

In particular, the speaker device 400 can achieve convergence directivity by a simple control of delaying the timing of the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 from the timing of the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 arrive simultaneously at the first wave field synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450 of the circular opening 411.

In addition, the speaker device 400 can achieve diffusion directivity by a simple control of adjusting the timing of the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 arrive simultaneously on a circular wave field synthesis line (on which the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A and the lower second wave field synthesis point P302B exist) that is outside the midline between the inner and outer circumference circles of the second opening portion 413 in a plan view of the first opening portion 412 and the second opening portion 413 from one direction of the central axis 450.

Furthermore, normal directivity can be achieved with the speaker device 400 by simply controlling the second speaker unit 600 so that the second sound wave 600 is not output, and the first speaker unit 500 so that the first sound wave 550 is output.

In addition, convergence directionality is used to implement first effects that are primarily aimed at players playing on the second gaming machine, such as effects suggesting the winning of a bonus role and effects navigating the push order in AT mode. This allows players to concentrate and enjoy the first effects, which are likely to be enjoyed by players with concentration, without being disturbed by other people in the vicinity of the second gaming machine, such as being noticed and peeked at.

In addition, the directionality of diffusion is used to implement second effects aimed primarily at people other than the player near the second gaming machine, such as notification effects that medal payouts are going well, notification effects that the game is in a bonus game state, notification effects that the game is in an AT state, and other effects that are intended to appeal to people other than the player near the second gaming machine. This allows the gaming establishment to effectively communicate the content of the second effects that are intended to appeal to people other than the player near the second gaming machine, and the gaming establishment can expect to improve the operating rate of the second gaming machine, for example.

In addition, normal directivity is used to implement third effects aimed at the player playing the second gaming machine and other people near the second gaming machine, such as notification effects that medal payouts are going well, notification effects that the game is in a bonus game state, and notification effects that the game is in an AT state. This makes it possible to communicate the content of the third effects to everyone near the second gaming machine, including the player.

[10.4. Modification of the second gaming machine]
In the second gaming machine described with reference to Figures 36 to 43 above, the speaker device 400 has been described as realizing three directivities, the convergence directivity of Figure 37(a), the diffusion directivity of Figure 37(b), and the diffusion directivity of Figure 37(c), but is not limited thereto. For example, in addition to realizing these three directivities, the speaker device 400 may not output the first sound wave 550, but may output the second sound wave 650 to be output from the second opening portion 413 to the outside of the housing 401, thereby realizing a directivity in which the sound wave from the speaker device 400 spreads in a substantially doughnut shape. The speaker device 400 may also realize a part of the directivities of these four directivities.

In addition, in the control of the convergence directivity in FIG. 39(a) above, the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed from the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the first wave field synthesis point P301 simultaneously with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, but this is not limited to this. For example, the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 may be adjusted so that the first sound wave 550, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652 arrive at the first wave field synthesis point P301 within a first time difference other than simultaneously. Note that the first time difference and the second time difference described below are the maximum time difference at which the human hearing does not recognize the sounds produced by the two sound waves as different sounds.

In addition, in the control of the diffusion directionality in Figure 40 (a) above, the timing of output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are adjusted so that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A simultaneously with the upper second sound wave 651 and the first sound wave 550 arrives at the lower second wave field synthesis point P302B simultaneously with the lower second sound wave 652, but this is not limited to this. For example, the timing of output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 may be adjusted so that the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 arrive at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A within a second time difference other than simultaneously, and the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652 arrive at the lower second wave field synthesis point P302B within a second time difference other than simultaneously.

In addition, if the second gaming machine has multiple speaker devices 400 as shown in FIG. 36, the multiple speaker devices 400 may be controlled to have different directivities during the same period. For example, if the second gaming machine has two speaker devices 400 as shown in FIG. 36, one may be controlled to have a converging directivity and the other may be controlled to have a diffusing directivity.

In addition, if the second gaming machine has multiple speaker devices 400 as shown in FIG. 36, the control of the directivity of each speaker device 400 may be performed independently of the control of the directivity of the other speaker devices 400.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the invention has been described with respect to a slot machine, but is not limited to this and can also be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

The above embodiments and the above variations can be combined as appropriate.

This embodiment can be widely applied to gaming machines installed in gaming facilities such as game arcades.

201...Sub CPU
400...speaker device 401...casing 411...opening 412...first opening portion 413...second opening portion 420...first opening portion 421...upper second opening portion 422...lower second opening portion 450...central axis 500...first speaker unit 550...first sound wave 600...second speaker unit 650...second sound wave 651...upper second sound wave 652...lower second sound wave P301...first wave field synthesis point P302A...upper second wave field synthesis point P302B...lower second wave field synthesis point 800, 821...first amplifier 801, 822...second amplifier 810...amplifier 851...first delay circuit 852...second delay circuit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine including a gaming machine main body, a front door attached to the gaming machine main body, a speaker device attached to the gaming machine main body or the front door, and a control means for controlling the output of an audio signal to the speaker device,
a first speaker unit that outputs a first sound wave based on the audio signal and is disposed on the first axis so that the first sound wave is output to the outside of the gaming machine from a first opening portion that is circular with the first axis as a center axis;
a second speaker unit that is disposed on the one axis farther from the first opening portion than the first speaker unit so that the second sound wave is outputted to the outside of the gaming machine from a second opening portion that is an annular shape having the one axis as a center axis, based on the audio signal;
the control means performs timing control in the output control to adjust a first sound output timing of the first sound wave by the first speaker unit and a second sound output timing of the second sound wave by the second speaker unit so that the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at a wave field synthesis location outside the gaming machine within a predetermined time difference ;
The control means performs a second timing control in the timing control to adjust the first sound output timing and the second sound output timing so that, in the second performance, the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at a circular wave field synthesis line that is outside a midline between an inner circumference circle and an outer circumference circle of the second opening portion in a plan view of the second opening portion from the one axial direction as the wave field synthesis location, within the predetermined time difference.
A gaming machine characterized by: The control means performs a first timing control in the timing control to adjust the first sound output timing and the second sound output timing so that the first sound wave and the second sound wave arrive at a wave field synthesis point on the one axis as the wave field synthesis location within the predetermined time difference in the first performance,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein the predetermined time difference is a maximum time difference at which the human hearing does not recognize the sound produced by the first sound wave and the sound produced by the second sound wave as different sounds .

Images